1996 Buick Park Avenue Owner's Manual

The 1996 Buick Park Avenue Owner’s ManualSeats and Restraint Systems ............................................................. 1-1This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains “SRS” system.Features and Controls .................................................................. 2-1This section explains how to start and operate your Buick.Comfort Controls and Audio Systems ..................................................... 3-1This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate youraudio system.YourDrivingandtheRoad .............................................................. 4-1Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.ProblemsontheRoad .................................................................. 5-1This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire oroverheated engine, etc.ServiceandAppearanceCare ............................................................ 6-1Here the manual tells you how to keep your Buick’ running properly and looking good.Maintenanceschedule .................................................................. 7-1This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.Customer Assistance Information ........................................................ 8-1This section tells you how to contact Buick for assistance and how to get service publications. It alsogives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-7.Index ................................................................................ 9-1Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly findsomething you want to read.i

We support voluntarytechnician certification.GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,BUICK, the BUCK Emblem and the name PARKAVENUE are registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changes in theproduct after that time without further notice. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick MotorDivision whenever it appears in this manual.Please keep this manual in your Buick, so it will be thereif you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sellthe vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the newowner can use it.WE SUPPORTVOLUNTARY TECHNICIANCERTIFICATION THROUGHNational Institute forAUTOMOTIVESERVICEEXCELLENCEFor Canadian Owners Who Prefer aFrench Language Manual:Aux proprietaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vousprocurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chezvotre concessionaire ou au:DGN Marketing Services Ltd.1500 Bonhill Rd.Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7Litho U.S.A. in@Copyright General Motors 1995 CorporaPart No. 25639451 B First Edition All Rightsii

“valve-in-head” engine, a light, powerful and reliableengine which would eventually influence the entireautomotive industry.William C. Durant was instrumental in promotingBuicks across the country using his Durant-DortCarriage Co. outlets and salespeople as the nucleus or agiant distribution system. He knew the Buick as a“self-seller.” If automobiles could be this good, hethought, maybe it was time to switch from the horse andbuggy business to automobiles.Walter Maur and Thomas BuickBuick’s chief engineer, Walter L. Marr (left), andThomas D. Buick, son of founder David Dunbar Buick,drove the first Flint Buick in a successful Flint-Detroitround trip in July 1904.David Buick was building gasoline engines by 1899,and Marr, his engineer, apparently built the first auto tobe called a Buick in 1900. However, Buick traditionallydates its beginnings to 1903. That was the year thecompany was reorganized, refinanced and moved fromDetroit to Flint. Buick has always been a productinnovator. Buick engineers developed theWilliam C. (Billy) DuvantAt the 1905 New YorkAuto Show, Durant tookorders for 1,000 Buicksbefore the company hadbuilt 40. On Buick’ssuccess, Durant created aholding company,September 16, 1908. Hecalled it General Motors.1.

Durant also created a racing team that won 500 racingtrophies in 1909 and 19 10, including successes atIndianapolis two years before the Indy 500 began.The success of Buick engines was visible not only onthe race track, but in endurance tests across the countryand around the world. Buick was the only car tocomplete a 1,000-mile Chicago-to-New York race in1906. And a Buick was the first car to travel acrossSouth America, driven from Buenos Aires, Argentina,over the Andes to Santiago, Chile in 1914.Buick drew plenty of attention because it could climbhills and run through mud like no other car. Buick’sendurance and reliability were world famous.During World War I, Buick built Liberty aircraft enginesas well as Red Cross ambulances so successfully thatone Buick ambulance was awarded the Croix de Guerreby the French government.As a builder of premier automobiles, Buick was hard hitby the Great Depression. However, new GeneralManager Harlow H. Curtice created popular new modelsincluding the Special and the Roadmaster. Buick salessoon flourished.I :I9II Model 21 Touring Car on Buick’s Test HillFirst Buick FactoryV

In World War 11, Buick built aircraft engines, tanks andother military hardware. This post-war period broughtgreat styling and engineering changes which resulted inincreased sales. The torque converter automatictransmission, Dynaflow, was introduced in the 1948Roadmaster. Buick’s famous “portholes” came alongin 1949.A high-compression V-8 engine was introduced in 1953.And Buick’s famous vertical pillar “toothy” grille,(introduced in 1942)’ became more massive in thepost-war era.I953 Skylark1949 RoadmasterMotor Trend magazine named the 1962 Buick Special“Car of the Year.” The first production V-6 engine wasused in the Special.vi

1962 Buick SpecialBuilt inside the walls of the old buildings in Buick’sformer Flint complex, which formed the cornerstone ofGeneral Motors, Buick City is a state-of-the-artassembly facility with more than 200 robots and otherhigh-tech equipment. It was completed in the fallof 1985.Buicks are, and will continue to be, premium Americanmotorcars with smooth power, high performance, richdetail and comfortable accommodation.Ed Mertz, ‘General Manager-, Buick Motor DivisionOur mission is simple:“Buick will provide Premium American Motorcarsbacked with services that exceed our customers’expectations, throughout the purchase, ownership,service and repurchase experience.”Buicks are SUBSTANTIAL.Buicks are DISTINCTIVE.Buicks are POWERFUL.Buicks are MATURE.

~~~~~ ~How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. If youdo this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll findthat pictures and words work together to explainthings quickly.IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inthe back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of allthat’s in the manual, and the page number where you’llfind it.Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell youabout things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Thenwe tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you orothers could be hurt.IYou will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this,” or “Don’tlet this happen.”

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:NOTICE:These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoidthe damage.When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in different colors or indifferent words.You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They usethe same words CAUTION or NOTICE.In the notice area, we tell you about something that candamage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would

Vehicle SymbolsThese are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.For example,these symbolsare used on anoriginal battery:ACAUTIONPOSSIBLEINJURYPROTECTEYES BYSHIELDINGCAUSTICBURNSAVOIDSPARKS ORFLAMESSPARK ORFLAMECOULDEXPLODEBATTERY,\I/,These symbolsare importantfor you andyour passengerswhenever yourvehicle isdriven:DOOR LOCKUNLOCKFASTENSEATBELTSPOWERWINDOWThese symbolshave to do withyour lights:e eTURNSIGNALSAHAZARDWARNINGFLASHER0DAYTIME -RUNNINGLAMPS '**FOG LAMPS $0These symbolsare on some ofyour controls:WINDSHIELDWIPERWINDSHIELDDEFROSTERWINDOWDEFOGGERVENTILATINGFANThese symbolsare used onwarning andindicator lights:COOLANTTEMP -BATTERYCHARGING I-1SYSTEM(0)HORN h=rBRAKEENGINE OIL e, n3PRESSUREFUELANTI-LOCK (@)BRAKESHere are someother symbolsyou may see:FUSEILIGHTER ISPEAKERbX

Section 1 Seats and Restraint SystemsHere you’ll find information about the seats in yourBuick and how to use your safety belts properly. Youcan also learn about some things you should not do withair bags and safety belts.Seats and Seat ControlsThis part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,and also about memory seats, reclining seatbacks andhead restraints.Manual SeatYou may have a manual seat on the passenger side ofyour Park Avenue. Move the lever under the front seatto unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Thenrelease the lever and try to move the seat with yourbody, to make sure the seat is locked into place.Power SeatFront Tilt Control (F): Raise the front of the seat bypressing on the left side of the switch. Press on the rightside of the switch to lower the front of the seat.Center Controls (C): Move the seat forward or back bypressing the control on the front or back. Raise the seatby pressing the control on the left. Press the control onthe right to lower the seat.1-1

Rear Tilt Control (R): Raise the rear of the seat bypressing the switch on the left. Pressing the switch onthe right lowers the rear of the seat.Mc or: rnd Mi1 5 (( n)If your Buick has this option, the control on the driver’sdoor armrest looks like this:You can use this memory function to save your seat andmirror adjustment settings by using the following procedure.Adjust the driver’s seat to a safe and comfortabledriving position. Adjust both outside mirrors to suityou. See “Outside Mirrors” in the Index.Press the SET button. You will hear one beep.Press one of the two MEMORY buttons withinfive seconds. You will hear two beeps to confirmthat the mirror and seat positions have been enteredinto memory.Now it’s set. When your Buick is in PARK (P) with theignition on, push the memory button you just storedand the seat and mirrors will move to the set position.With the ignition OFF, the system will work in any shiftlever position.To set the seat and mirror positions for a seconddriver, follow the previous steps, but use the otherMEMORY button.If you press the wrong MEMORY button, or if there isa third driver, the seat adjuster will still work.The EXIT button allows for easy exit from the vehicle.Push the EXIT button while in PARK (P) with theignition on, or anytime while the ignition is OFF and theseat will move all the way down and back. You will heara beep when the EXIT button is pressed.1-2

Remote Keyless Entry Personal ChoiceFeature (Option)ieated Front Seats (Option)If your Park Avenueis equipped with theRemote KeylessEntry System, eachtransmitter can beprogrammed to movethe driver’s seat andoutside mirrors to a setmemory position whenthe transmitter’sUNLOCK buttonis pressed.For programming instructions, see “Personal ChoiceFeatures” in the Index.If your vehicle has this option, the controls are locatedto the side of the driver and front passenger seats.Push the switch closest to the front of the driver’s seatforward and the driver’s seat will start to warm up.Push the switch closest to the front of the frontpassenger’s seat forward and the front passenger seatwill begin to warm up.1-3

The light on top of the switch will turn orange for low orred for high. Push the switch rearward to stop the seatfrom warming.Reclining Front SeatbacksTo adjust the seatback, liftthe lever on the outer sideof the seat. Release the leverto lock the seatback whereyou want it. Pull up on thelever and the seat will go toits upright position.If you have the powerrecline option, it works withthe switch on the side of theseat. Push it back to reclinethe seat, push it forwardto return the seat to itsupright position.

Safety Belts: They’re for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safety beltsproperly. It also tells you some things you should not dowith safety belts.And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System(SRS), or air bag system.A CAUTIOI..r -Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t weara safety belt properly. If you are in a crash andyou’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuriescan be much worse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash, you mightnot be if you are buckled up. Always fasten yoursafety belt, and check that your passengers’ beltsare fastened properly too.1Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as a reminderto buckle up. (See “SafetyBelt Reminder Light” inthe Index.)In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says towear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.Put someone on it.Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seaton wheels.1-7

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

or the instrument panel ...or the safety belts!With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

Here Are Questions Many People Ask Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?About Safety Belts -- and the AnswersA:Q:A:Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?Air bags are in many vehicles today and willbe in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- youand your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 b/h).Safety belts are for everyone.1-10

How cu ear Safety Be,,, +erlyAdultThis part is only for people of adult size.Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are different rules forsmaller children and babies. If a child will be riding inyour Buick, see the part of this manual called “Children.”Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.We’ll start with the driver position.This part describes the driver’s restraint system.Lap-S----Ider BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wearit properly.1. Close and lock the door.2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)so you can sit up straight.3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety BeltExtender” at the end of this section.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.1-11

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . .:Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you., .. -.#!The lap part of the belt should be worn. low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,' this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at -your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the 'shoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or crash.To move it down, squeeze the release handle and movethe height adjuster to the desired position. You can movethe adjuster up just by pushing up on the bottom of therelease handle. After you move the adjudter to whereyou want it, try to move it down without squeezing therelease handle to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt iscentered on your shoulder. The belt should be away fromyour face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.@’ What’s wrong with this?IYou can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo.loose. In a crash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increase injury. Theshoulder belt should fit against your body.A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.

Q: What’s wrong with this?You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.1-14

@ What’s wrong with this?You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force to theribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injure internal organslike your liver or spleen.A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

&.’ What’s wrong with this?You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. Ina crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of thebelt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,make it straight so it can work properly, or askyour dealer to fix it.LA: The belt is twisted across the body.1-16

Your Buick has two air bags -- one air bag for the driverand another air bag for the right front passenger.Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both thebelt and your vehicle.Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) or air bag system.You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if youhave an air bag. Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it. The airbag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, itworks with safety belts but doesn’t replace them.Air bags are designed to work only in moderate tosevere crashes where the front of your vehicle hitssomething. They aren’t designed to inflate at all inrollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes.Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver,should wear a safety belt properly -- whether ornot there’s an air bag for that person.1-17

‘!\ CAUTION:‘Air bags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflatingair bag, it could seriously. injure you. Safety beltshelp keep you in position for an air bag inflationin a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even -with an air bag. The driver should sit as far backas possible while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle./I\ LAUTION:‘IAn inflating air bag can seriously injure smallchildren. Always secure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see, the part of this manualcalled “Children” and the caution label on theright front passenger’s safety belt.AIR BAGAIRBAGThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows AIR BAG.The system checks the air bag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Indexfor more information.

How the __Bag System WorksWhere is the air bag?The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.The right front passenger's air bag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger's side.1-19

Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to, thesteering wheel or instrument panel. Also, don’tput anything (such as pets or objects) betweenany occupant and the steering wheel orinstrument panel. If something is between anoccupant and an air bag, it could affect theperformance of the air bag -- or worse, it couldcause injury.When should an air bag inflate?The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into awall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level isabout 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range. If yourvehicle strikes something that will move or deform, suchas a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. Theair bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, sideimpacts or rear impacts, because inflation would nothelp the occupant.In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damageto a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact andthe vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only oneindication of this.What makes an air bag inflate?In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle issuddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensingsystem triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azidesealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogengas, which inflates the air bag, The inflator, air bag andrelated hardware are all part of the air bag modulespacked inside the steering wheel and in the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. The air bag supplements theprotection provided by safety belts. Air bags distributethe force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’supper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butair bags would not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward theair bag. Air bags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and then only inmoderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.What will you see after an air bag inflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, This occursso quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the air bag module inthe steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, willbe hot for a short time. The part of the bag that comesinto contact with you may be warm, but it will never betoo hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dustcoming from vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag inflation will not preventhe driver from seeingor from being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stoppeople from leaving the vehicle.When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.If you have breathing problems but can’t get outof the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or door.The air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your airbag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag systemwon’t be there to help protect you in another crash.A new system will include air bag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

and diagnostic module, which records informationabout the air bag system. The module recordsinformation about the readiness of the system, ‘whenthe sensors are activated and driver’s safety beltusage at deployment.0 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystem. Improper service can mean that yoyr air bagsyst,em won’t work properly. See your dealerfor service.NOTICE:If you damage the cover for the driver’s-or theright front passenger’s air bag, they may notwork properly. You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel’or both air thebag module and the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s air bag. Do not open orbreak the air bag covers.Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped BuickAir bags affect how your Buick should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag system in several placesaround your vehicle. You don’t want the system toinflate while someone is working on your vehicle. YourBuick dealer and the Park Avenue Service Manual haveinformation about servicing your vehicle and the air bagsystem. To purchase a service manual, see “Service andOwner Publications’’ in the Index.For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to an air bag whenit inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with ‘yellow tapeor yellow connectors. They are probably part ofthe air bag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.me air bag system does not need regular maintenance.1-22

Safety Belt-,ring PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible, belowthe rounding, throughout the pregnancy.The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.Right Front Passenger PositionThe right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,’’earlier in this section.When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again.If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be sureto use the correct buckle when buckling yourlap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will notgo fully into the buckle, see if you are using the bucklefor the center passenger position.1-23

BeltIf your vehicle has a front split seat and a rear benchseat, someone can sit in the center positions.When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lapsafety belt, which has no retractor. To make the beltlonger, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

Rear Seat PassengersIt’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rearseat are hurt more often in crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrownout of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike othersin the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.Rear Seat Outside Passenger PositionsTo make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown untilthe belt is snug.Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.io

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe positions next to the windows have lap-shoulderbelts. Here’s how to wear one properly...1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latchplate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. .If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender”at the end of this section. Make sure the release button onthe buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.1-26

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.1-27

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increase injury. Theshoulder belt should fit against your body.To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for children who have outgrownchild restraints and for small adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt awayfrom the neck and head.There is one guide for each outside passenger position ipthe rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort forchildren who have outgrown child restraints and forsmaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed onthe shoulder belts.. Here’s how to install a comfort guideand use the safety belt:1. Pull the elastic cord out fi-om between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.1-29

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt intothe slots of the guide.3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guideon top.

hChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! That includesinfants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and in everyCanadian province says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.Smaller Children and Babie4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.To remove and store the comfort guides, just perform thesesteps in reverse order. Squeeze the belt edges together sothat you can take them out from the guides. Pull the guideupward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guideonto the clip. Rotate the guide and clip inward and inbetween the seatback and the interior body, leaving onlythe loop of elastic cord exposed.Smaller children and babies should always berestrained in a child or infant restraint. Theinstructions for the restraint will say whether it isthe right type and size for your child. A veryyoung child’s hip bones are so small that aregular belt might not stay low on the hips, as itshould. Instead, the belt will likely be over thechild’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would applyforce right on the child’s abdomen, which couldcause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure thatany child small enough for one is always properlyrestrained in a child or infant restraint.-31

heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crashat only 25 mph (40 kndh), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) babywill suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force onyour arms. The baby would be almost impossibleto hold.Secure the baby in an infant restraint.INever hold a baby in your arms while riding in avehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much -- until acrash. During a crash a baby will beCome soCAUTION: (Continued)I

Child RestraintsBe sure the child restraint is designed to be used in avehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meetsFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system inyour vehicle, but the child also has to be secured withinthe restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.The instructions that come with the infant or childrestraint will show you how to do that.Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We atGeneral Motors therefore recommend that you put yourchild restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:A CATTTION:I - - eA child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured if the right front passenger’sair bag inflates. Thisbecause the back of arear-facing child restraint would be very close tothe inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the rear seat.You may, however, secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat. Before you securea forward-facing child restraint, always move thefront passenger seat as far back as it will go. Or,secure the child restraint in the rear seat.

A child in a child restraint in the center front seatcan be badly injured by the right front passengerair bag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraintin the center front seat. It’s always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may,however, secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat, but only withthe seat moved all the way back.Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can movearound in a collision or sudden stop and injure people inthe vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any childrestraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.If your child restraint has a top strap, it should beanchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, youcan ask your Buick dealer to put it in for you. If youwant to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tellyou how to do it.For cars first sold in Canada, child restraints with a topstrap must be anchored according to Canadian law.

Your dealer can obtain the hardware kit and install it foryou, or you may install it yourself using the instructionsprovided in the kit.Use the tether hardware kit available from the dealer.The hardware and installation instructions werespecifically designed for this vehicle.3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.:wing ,tsidcU1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructionsfor the child restraint.2. Secure the child in the child restraint as theinstructions say.Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint.

I4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt whileyou push down on the child restraint.6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety beltwill move freely again and be ready to work for an adultor larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the CenterRear Seat Positic-See the earlier part about the top strap if the childrestraint has one.UYou’ll be using the lap belt.IA child in a child restraint in the center front seatcan be badly injured by the right front passengerair bag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraintin the center front seat. It’s always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may,however, secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat, but only withthe seat moved all the way back.1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latchplate and pulling it along the belt.2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructionsfor the child restraint.3. Secure the child in the child restraint as theinstructions say.

4. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around therestraint. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you pushdown on the child restraint.Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure. If it isn't, secure therestraint in a different place in the vehicle andcontact the child restraint maker for their adviceabout how to attach the child restraint properly.child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat PositionUYour vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured if the right front passenger’sair bag inflates. This is because the back of arear-facing child restraint would be very close tothe inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facingchild restraint in the rear seat.You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier partabout the top strap if the child restraint has one.1.2.3.4.Because your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will gobefore securing a forward-facing child restraint.(See “Seats” in the Index.)Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructionsfor the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint as theinstructions say.Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.If the shoulder belt goes in front of the chdd’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint.

5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.6. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock.

Larger ChiL wAA7. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into theretractor while you push down on the child restraint.8. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety beltwill move freely again and be ready to work for an adultor larger child passenger.Children who have outgrown child restraints shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.If you have the choice, a child should sit next to awindow so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use thesafety belts properly.Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out ina crash.Children who aren’t buckled up can strike otherpeople who are.A CAUTION:INever do this.Here two children are wearing the same belt. Thebelt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In acrash, the two children can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A belt must be used byonly one person at a time.@ What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder belt isvery close to the child’s face or neck?A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, butbe sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide. If thechild is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is stillvery close to the child’s face or neck, you mightwant to place the child in the center seat position,the one that has only a lap belt.

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behindthe child. If the child wears the belt in this way, ina crash the child might slide under the belt. Thebelt’s force would then be applied right on thechild’s abdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. The extender willbe just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle thatyou choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach itto the regular safety belt.Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system fromdoing its job, have it repaired.Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt istorn or frayed, get a new one right away.Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a CrashIf you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if wornduring a more severe crash, then you need new belts.If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have safety beltor seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairsmay be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used atthe time of the collision.If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the specialpart of the safety belt that goes through the seat to theadjuster may need to be replaced.If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier inthis section.

Section 2 Features and ControlsHere you can learn about the many standard andoptional features on your Buick, and information onI starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are theinstrument panel and the warning systems that tell you ifeverything is working properly -- and what to do if youhave a problem.KeysI A CAUTION:Leaving young children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A childor others could be badly injured or even killed.They could operate power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Don’tleave the keys in a vehicle with young children.

The ignition keys arefor the ignition only.The door keys are for thedoors and all other locks.When a new Park Avenue is delivered, the dealerremoves the plugs from the keys, and gives them to thefirst owner. However, if the ignition key does not have aplug, there may be a bar-coded key tag instead.Each plug has a code on it that tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep theplugs in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll beable to have new ones made easily using these plugs orthe tag. If your ignition keys don’t have plugs, go toyour Buick dealer for the correct key code if you need anew ignition key.NOTICE:Your Buick has a number of features that canhelp prevent theft. But you can have a lot oftrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lockyour keys inside. You may even have to damageyour vehicle to get in. So be sure you haveextra keys.

Door LocksUnlocked doors can be dangerous.Passengers -- especially children -- can easilyopen the doors and fall out. When a door islocked, the inside handle won’t open it.Outsiders can easily enter through an unlockeddoor when you slow down or stop your vehicle.This may not be so obvious: You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety beltsproperly, lock your doors, and you will be farbetter off whenever you drive your vehicle.There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.From the outside, use your door key or Remote KeylessEntry, if your vehicle has this option.To lock the door from theinside, slide the lock controllever down.To unlock the door, slide thelock control lever up.

Central Door Unlocking System (Option)If the driver’s door key is held in the unlock position formore than one second, all doors will electronically unlock.Power Door LocksWith power door locks, youcan lock or unlock all doorsof your vehicle by usingeither the driver or frontpassenger power doorlock switch.Memory Door Locks (Option)Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every timeyou move your shift lever out of PARK (P), all of thedoors will lock. And, every time you stop and moveyour shift lever into PARK (P), your doors will unlock.If someone needs to get out while you’re not inPARK (P), have that person use the manual or powerlock. When the door is closed again, it will not lockautomatically. Just use the manual or power lock to lockthe door again. If you need to lock your doors beforeshifting out of PARK (P), just use the manual or powerlock button to lock the doors.2-4

uDrdmizing Your Memory Door Locks FeatureYou can program the memory door locks feature tochange to the following modes:Mode0123OperationNo automatic door lock or unlock.All doors automatically lockwhen shifted out of PARK (P).No automatic door unlock.All doors automatically lock whenshifted out of PARK (P). Onlythe driver’s door automaticallyunlocks when shifted intoPARK (P).All doors automatically lock whenshifted out of PARK (P). All doorsautomatically unlock when shiftedinto PARK (P).To change modes:1. Close all doors and turn the ignition on. Keep alldoors closed throughout this procedure.2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switchthrough Step 4.3. Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter. The automatic door locks will remain inthe current mode.4. Press the LOCK button on the transmitter again.Each time the transmitter’s LOCK button is pressed,the mode will advance by one, going from 3 to0 to 1, etc.5. Release the power door lock switch. Theautomatic door locks will remain in the mostrecent mode selected.Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3.2

CHILDSECURITYLOCK-SET LEVERON BOTHREAP DOORSTo use one of these locks:1. Open one of the rear doors.Your Buick is equippedwith rear door securitylocks that help preventpassengers from openingthe rear doors of yourvehicle from the inside.2. Move the lever on the door all the way up to theENGAGED position.3. Close the door.4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside when this feature is in use.To open a rear door when the security lock is on:1. Unlock the door from the inside.2. Then open the door from the outside.If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults orolder children who ride in the rear won’t be able to openthe rear door from the inside. You should let adults andolder children know how these security locks work, andhow to cancel the locks.To cancel the rear door security lock:1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the doorfrom the outside.2. Move the lever all the way down.3. Do the same thing for the other rear door.The rear door locks will now work normally.2-6

Lockout ProtectionThe power door locks will not work if the key is left inthe ignition with the driver’s door open. You canoverride this feature by holding the power door lockswitch for more than three seconds, unless the engineis running.Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open yourdoor and set the locks from inside, then get out and closethe door.Remote Keyless Entry System(Option)If your Buick has this option, you can lock and unlockyour doors or unlock your trunk from up to 30 feet(9 m) away using the key chain transmitter suppliedwith your vehicle.Your Remote KeylessEntry System operateson a radio frequencysubject to FederalCommunicationsCommission (FCC)Rules.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.2-7

Should interference to this system occur, try this:0 Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary.See the instructions on battery replacement.Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. This product has a maximum range.0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.See your Buick dealer or a qualified technicianfor service.Changes or modifications to this system by other than anauthorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.The driver’s door will unlock when UNLOCK ispressed. If pressed again within five seconds, all doorswill unlock. Pressing any button will also illuminate theinterior lamps (see “Illuminated Entry” in the Index).All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed.The trunk will unlock when the trunk open symbol ispressed, but only when the ignition is in the LOCK orOFF position. The trunk symbol will also work whenthe ignition is on, but only while in PARK (P).When the button with the horn symbol on the keytransmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and theheadlamps and taillamps will flash for up to twominutes. This can be turned off by pressing the instantalarm button again, unlocking the vehicle with key a orby turning the ignition on.If only the instant alarm button works, the transmitterneeds to be resynchronized to the receiver. Do this bypressing and holding both the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons for about eight seconds; you must be withinrange of the vehicle.Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the hornwill chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once. Thesystem should now operate properly.mal Choice FerEach key transmitter can be programmed to the driver’spreference for memory door locks, security feedback,delayed locking and perimeter lighting. See each featurein the Index.The transmitters can also be programmed to move thedriver’s seat and outside mirrors to a set memory positionwhen the key transmitter’s UNLOCK button is pressed.2-8

To program the system:1.2.Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortable and safedriving position. Adjust both outside mirrors to suityou. See “Outside Mirrors” in the Index.Press the SET button on the driver’s door armrest.You will hear one beep.3. Within five seconds, press one of the two memorybuttons on the armrest. You will hear two beeps toconfirm that the mirror and the seat positions areentered into memory.4. Press the UNLOCK button on the appropriatetransmitter within five seconds. You will heartwo beeps.e second key transmitter can be programmed torecord a different seat and mirror position by followingthe same steps.If you prefer to program the exit seat position, whichmoves the seat completely down and back, followthese steps:1. Press the SET button on the driver’s door armrest.You will hear one beep.2. Press the EXIT button on the armrest. You will hearone beep, but the seat will not move at this time.3. Press the UNLOCK button on the appropriatetransmitter within five seconds. You will heartwo beeps.This personal choice feature will work only when thevehicle is in PARK (P). A beep will sound inside thevehicle when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter ispressed to move the seat and mirrors.To turn this feature off, press SET, then UNLOCKwithin five seconds.

Security FeedbackThis provides feedback to the driver when the vehiclereceives a command from the key transmitter. Thefollowing modes may be selected:Mode012345Security FeedbackNo feedback when locking orunlocking vehicle.No feedback when locking;exterior lamps flash whenunlocking vehicle.Exterior lamps flash whenlocking; no feedback whenunlocking vehicle.Exterior lamps flash when lockingand when unlocking vehicle.Exterior lamps flash and hornchirps when locking; no feedbackwhen unlocking vehicle.Exterior lamps flash and horn chlrpswhen locking; exterior lamps flashwhen unlocking vehicle.Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5. Tochange to another mode:1. Press and hold the power door lock switch.2. Press the opened trunk button on the transmitter. Thetransmitter will remain in its current mode.3. Press the opened trunk button again. Each time theopened trunk button is pressed, the transmitter willadvance to the next mode.4. Release the power door lock switch.Delayed LockingNote: This feature is available only if you request yourdealer to activate this option. After initial activation,you can turn this feature on and off by using thefollowing procedure.This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking ofthe vehicle. When the power door lock switch is pressedwith the key removed from the ignition and the driver’sdoor open, a chime will sound three times to signalthat the lock delay mode is active. When all doorshave been closed, the doors will lock automatically afterfive seconds. If any door is opened before this, thefive-second timer will reset itself once all the doors havebeen closed again.

Pressing the door lock switch twice within two secondswill override this feature.The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off foreach remote transmitter.To turn the feature on:1. Press and hold the power door lock switchthroughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.2. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter.The lock delay is still off and all doors will remainlocked.3. Press the UNLOCK button on the remotetransmitter again. Lock delay is now active andall doors will unlock.4. Release the power door lock switch.To turn this feature off, repeat the above procedure.If your vehicle is not equipped with Remote KeylessEntry, use the following procedure to turn this feature onand off.1. With the ignition on, press and hold the power doorlock switch. All doors will lock.2. Toggle the headlamp switch seven times (off to on isconsidered one toggle). The doors will unlock toconfirm that the feature is now on.3. Release the power door lock switch.To turn this feature off, repeat the above procedure.Theft-Deterrent SystemThe key transmitter will arm the theft-deterrentsystem whenever the doors are closed and you pushthe LOCK button. It will disarm the system when youpush UNLOCK.2-11

Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased throughyour dealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when. you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacement transrditter .toyour vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be,matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehiclecan have only four transmitters matched to it.See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.Battery ReplacementUnder normal use; the battery in your key chaintransmitter should last about two years.You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any -location. If you have toget close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.48For battery replacement, use a Dwacell@ battery, typeDL-2032,’or a similar type.

To replace the battery:1.2.3.4.5.Insert a coin into the notch near the keyring. Turn thecoin counterclockwise to separate the two halves ofthe transmitter.Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil toremove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.Remove and replace the battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate.Be sure not to touch any of the black boxes or thegreen surfaces. Any static transferred from yourbody to these areas may cause the transmitter tobe inoperative.Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sureno moisture can enter.Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing andholding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for abouteight seconds within range of the vehicle. Once thetransmitter is resynchronized, the horn will chirp andthe exterior lamps will flash once.TrunkTrunk Lock ReleaseTo unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the door keyand turn it.Remote Trunk ReleasePress the TRUNK releasebutton located to the left ofthe steering column torelease the trunk lid.The remote trunk release lockout switch located in theglove box must be in the on position and the transaxle inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for this feature to work.

Remote Trunk Release LockoutThe remote trunk releaselockout switch in the glovebox allows you to secureitems in the trunk. Move thetrunk release lockout switchto off, lock the glove boxand take the key with you.Now the remote TRUNKrelease to the left of thesteering column will notopen the trunk.To allow the remote TRUNK release switch to the left ofthe steering column to operate again, move the trunkrelease lockout switch to on.Trunk Security OverrideThe optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter willopen the trunk even if the trunk release lockout switchis in the off position.It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can’t see or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connections mustpass through the seal between the body and thetrunk lid:Make sure all windows are shut.0 Wrn the fan on your heating or coolingsystem to its highest speed with the settingon any airflow selection except RECIRC.That will force outside air into your vehicle.See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.0 If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

Trunk Lid Automatic Pull-Down Feature(Option)If your Buick has this option, never slam the trunk lid toclose it. Instead, gently lower the trunk lid until it isnearly shut -- the automatic pull-down will take overand lock the trunk firmly.A CAUTION:Your car may have an automatic pull-downfeature that helps close the trunk electronically.Your fingers can be trapped under the trunk lidas it goes down. Your fingers could be injured,and you would need someone to help you freethem. Keep your fingers away from the trunk lidas you close it and as it is going down.ITheftVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your Buick has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can makeit impossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.Key in the IgnitionIf you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s aneasy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- sodon’t do it.With the ignition OFF and the driver’s door open, you’llhear a chime reminding you to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Yoursteering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignitionand transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.

Parking at NightPark in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock yourvehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.Parking LotsIf you park in a lot where someone will be watchingyour vehicle, it’s besto lock it up and take your keys.But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What ifyou have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunkor glove box.0 Lock the glove box.0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s.0 Then take the door key with you.Universal Theft-Deterrent (Option)SECURITYIf your Buick has thisoption, it has atheft-deterrent alarmsystem. With this system,the SECURITY light willflash as you open the door(if your ignition is OFF).This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrentsystem. Here’s how to do it:1. Open the door.2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or theRemote Keyless Entry transmitter. The SECURITYlight should come on and stay on.3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go offafter approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the SECURITY light goes off.,2-16

If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or theRemote Keyless Entry transmitter, the alarm will go off.It will also go off if the trunk lock is damaged. Yourvehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will sound forseveral minutes, then will turn off to save battery power.Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate ifyou lock the doors with a key or manual door lock. Itactivates only if you use a power door lock switch orRemote Keyless Entry transmitter. You should alsoremember that you can start your vehicle with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm has been set off. Youmust still shut off the alarm by inserting the key in thedoor lock.Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked after the doorsare closed.Always unlock a door with a key, or use the RemoteKeyless Entry transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will set off the alarm.If you set off the alarrn by accident, unlock any doorwith your key.You can also turn off the alarm by using the RemoteKeyless Entry transmitter, if you have it. The alarmwon’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.How to Test the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by first having the driver’swindow down. Activate the system by locking thedoors with the power door lock switch or the RemoteKeyless Entry transmitter. Get out of the car, close thedoor and wait for the SECURITY light to go out. Thenreach in through the window, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open the door. This should setoff the alarm.If the alarm does not sound when it should, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. Toreplace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” inthe Index.To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.12-17

PAS7-Kej I T Your vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key 11(Personalized AutomotiveSecurity System)theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key 11 is a passivetheft-deterrent system.It works when you insertor remove the key fromthe ignition.PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition keythat matches a decoder in your vehicle.When the PASS-Key I1 system senses that someone isusing the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starterand fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starterwon’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someonetries to start your vehicle again or uses another keyduring this time, the vehicle will not start. Thisdiscourages someone from randomly trying differentkeys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to makea match.The ignition key must be clean and dry before it’sinserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If theengine does not start and the SECURITY light comeson, the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and tryagain. The SECURITY light may remain on during thistime. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appearsto be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and tryanother ignition key. At this time, you may also want tocheck the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in theIndex). If the starter won’t work with the other key, yourvehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the firstignition key may be faulty. See your Buick dealer or alocksmith who can service the PASS-Key 11.

If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged ormissing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and theSECURITY light will flash. But you don’t have,to waitthree minutes before trying another ignition key.See your Buick dealer or a locksmith who can servicethe PASS-Key 11 to have a new key made.,If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comeson and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine ifyou turn it off. Your PASS-Key 11 system, however, isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourBuick dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key I1 system.If you lose or damage a PASS-Key 11 ignition key, seeyour Buick dealer or lockskth a who can servicePASS-Key 11 to have a new key made.New Vehicle “Break-In”NOTICE:Your modern Buick doesn’t need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the longrun if you follow these guidelines:Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast orslow -- for the first 500 miles (804 km).Don’t make full-throttle starts.Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings aren’t yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See“Towing a Trailer” in the Index for moreinformation.

Ignition PositionsII .With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turnthe switch to five different positions.A.. cIE,. .OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine butstill turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering -.wheel like LOCK and it doesn’f send any electricalpower to the accessories. Use OFF if you must haveyour vehicle in motion while the engine is not running.RUN (D): This is- an on position that the switch returnsto after you start your engine and release the switch.This is the position for driving.-Even when the engine isnot running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical ’power accessories and to display some instrument panelwarning lights.START (E): This position starts your engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The ignition switch willreturn to RUN for normal driving.NOTICE:ACCESSORY (A): An on position in which you canoperate your electrical power accessories. Press in theignition switch as you hun the top of it toward you.LOCK (B): This is the only position in which yqu canremove the key. This position locks your ignition, steeringwheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’tturn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, thenturn the steering wheel left and right while youturn the key hard. But turn the key only withyour hand. Using a tool to force it could breakthe key or the ignition switch. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

~~ ~~Key Reminder WarningIf you leave your key in the ignition, in the OFFposition, you will hear a warning chime when you openthe driver’s door.Retained Accessory Power (Option)If you have the optional Remote Keyless Entry, afteryou turn your ignition off and even remove the key, youwill still have electrical power to such accessories as theradio and power windows for up to 10 minutes. But ifyou open a door, power is shut off.Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn yourignition key to START. When the engine starts, letgo of the key. The idle speed will go down as yourengine gets warm.IHolding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to bedrained much sooner. And the excessive heat candamage your starter motor.2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key inSTART for about three to five seconds at a time untilyour engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try to help avoid draining your battery.INOTICE:Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Buickis moving. If you do, you could damage thetransaxle. Shift to PARK (p) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

I3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floorand holding it there as you hold the key START in forabout three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the same thing, but this time keepthe pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears theextra gasoline fi-om the engine. After waiting about15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.NOTICE:Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the waythe engine operates. Before qdding electricalequipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,your engine might not perform properly.If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, seethe part of this manual thatells how to do itwithout damaging your vehicle. See “TowingYour Vehicle” in the Index.Engine Coolant Heater (Option)In very cold weather, .Oo F (- 18 O C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum offour hours prior to starting your vehicle.To use the coolant heater:1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.Plugging the cord’into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical ,shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord could overheat and causea fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug thecord into a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated forat least 15 amps.2-22

4. After you’ve used the coolant heater,k sure to storethe cord as it was before to keep it away from movingengine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead oftrying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour Buick dealer in the area where you’ll be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice forthat particular area.Automatic Transaxle OperationYour automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on thesteering column.There are several different positions for your shift lever.PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the bestposition to use when you start your engine because yourvehicle can’t move easily.’ A CAUTION:It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully PARK in (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To.be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever to PARK (P).See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. Ifyou’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” inthe Index.I2-23

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range beforestarting the engine. Your Buick has a brake-transaxleshift interlock. You have to fully apply your regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition key is in the RUN position. If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- pushthe shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then move the shift leverinto the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”in the Index.REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.NOTICE:Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle ismoving forward could damage your transaxle.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis stopped.To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “IfYou’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your enginedoesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’realready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) whileyour engine is ‘(racing”(running at high speed) isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on thebrake pedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hit people orobjects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.I NOTICE:Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engineracing isn’t covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@): This position is fornormal driving. If you need more power for passing, andyou’re:0 Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving, however, it offers more power and lower fueleconomy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a).Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@):0 When driving on hilly, winding roads0 When towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gearsWhen going down a steep hillSECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.It can help control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want to useyour brakes off and on.I NOTICE:Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph(88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@) orTHIRD (3) as much as possible.Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are goingslower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you candamage your engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. Ifthe selector lever is put in FIRST (l), the transaxlewon’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is goingslowly enough.I NOTICE:Automatic Ride ControlYour Park Avenue automatic ride control provides acomfortable, controlled ride. This suspension systemkeeps adjusting your car’s ride and handling dependingupon speed and road conditions. Automatic ride controluses three levels of control to ensure a combination ofbalance and stability.If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try todrive. This might happen if you were stuck invery deep sand or mud or were up against a solidobject. You could damage your transaxle.Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t holdyour vehicle there with only the acceleratorpedal. This could overheat and damage thetransaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)to hold your vehicle in position on hill. a2-26

Pal _____Your Park Avenue has aPUSHTORELEASEparking brake pedal. To setthe parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal downwith your right foot. Pushdown the parking brakepedal with your left foot. Ifthe ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light willcome on and a single chimewill be heard.The parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels.To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down and push the parking brake pedal with yourleft foot. This will unlock the pedal. When you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to therelease position.If you try to drive off (approximately 40 feet (12.2 m)),with the parking brake on, the brake light stays onand a continuous chime sounds until you release theparking brake.NOTICE:Driving with the parking brake on can causeyour rear brakes to overheat. You may have toreplace them, and you could also damage otherparts of your vehicle.If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That part showswhat to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into PARK (P)1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.If you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, evenwhen you’re on fairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) positionas follows:0 Pull the lever toward you.2-28

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunningMove the lever up as far as it will go.3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).I It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. And, if youleave the vehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You or others couldbe injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with theengine running unless you have to.If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into the PARK (P)position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it meansthat the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl inthe transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’sseat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)”in the Index.When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) befure you release the parking brake.If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the transaxle, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).Shifting Out of PARK (P)Your Buick has a brake-transaxle shift interlock. Youhave to fully apply your regular brake before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the RUNposition. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into the gear you want.If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can Ishift out of PARK (P), try this:1. Turn the key to OFF. Open and close the driver’sdoor to turn off the Retained Accessory Powerfeature (if equipped).2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gearyou want.5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That BurnEngine ExhaustA CAUTION:Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't parkover papers, leaves, dry grass or other things thatcan burn.Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.You might have exhaust coming in if:Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent.Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.Your vehicle was damaged when driving overhigh points on the road or over road debris.Repairs weren't done correctly.0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had beenmodified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:0 Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; andHave your vehicle fixed immediately.2-31

Running Your Engine WhileYou’re ParkedIt’s better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.A CAUTIOF . ;Idling the engine with the air system control offcould allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle(see the earlier Caution under “EngineExhaust”).Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe fan switch is at the highest setting. One placethis can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- withCO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in agarage with the engine running.Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See“Blizzard” in the Index.)A f‘ AT TTTnNIt can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you’ve left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever to PARK (P).Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’tmove. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling atrailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.2-32

WindowsPower WindowsSwitches on the driver’s armrest control each of thewindows while the ignition is on or retained accessorypower is active. In addition, each passenger door has aswitch for its own window.Express-Down WindowThe switch for the driver’s window has an express-downfeature. Pull the switch back all the way, release it andthe window will lower automatically. To stop thewindow from lowering, push the switch again. Topartially open the window, pull the switch back andquickly release it. To raise the window, hold theswitch forward.Window LockPress the LOCK switch on the driver’s armrest todisable all passenger window switches. The driver’swindow controls will still be operable. This is a usefulfeature when you have young children as passengers.Press the UNLOCK switch to allow passengers to usetheir window switches again.HornNearly the entire surface of the center pad of thesteering wheel is an active horn switch. Press anywhereon the pad to sound the horn.

ion everThe lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes your:a Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicatora Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer andPassing Signala Windshield Wipersa Windshield Washer0 Cruise Control

Turn Signal and Lane Change IndicatorAn arrow on the instrumentpanel will flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two,downward (for left) positions. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return byitself when you release it.As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’tflash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned outand other drivers won’t see your turn signal.If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses’ and CircuitBreakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.2-35

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring forthe trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flasheven if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the frontand rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure theyare working.When the high beams areon, a light on the instrumentpanel will also be on.lbm Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turnsignal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal leverto the off position.Headlamp High/Low Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to high orhigh to low, pull the turn signal lever toward you, thenrelease it.2-36

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning the bandmarked WIPER.For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Holdit there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers willstop after one cycle. If you want more cycles,. hold theband on MIST longer.You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delaybetween wipes. This can be very useful in light rain orsnow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. Thecloser to LO, the shorter the delay.For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band awayfrom you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, movethe band to OFF.Remember that damaged wiper blades may preventyou from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoiddamage, be sure to clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen tothe windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Ifyour blades become damaged, get new blades orblade inserts.Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.2-37

Windshield WasherAt the top of the multifunction lever there’s a paddlewith the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle for less than a second. Thewipers will clear the window and then either stop orreturn to your preset speed. For more washer cycles,push and hold the paddle.1WASHERFLUID LOWIf this light comes on, itmeans you’re low onwasher fluid.In freezing weather, don’t use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blockingyour vision.Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A badmud splash can block your vision. You could hit anothervehicle or go off the road. Check your washer fluid leveloften. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.2-38

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you canmaintain a speed of about25 mph (40 kmb) or morewithout keeping your footon the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips.Cruise control does not work at speeds below about25 mph (40 km/h).When you apply your brakes, the cruise controlshuts off.Cruise control can be dangerous where youcan’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,don’t use your cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fast changesin tire traction can cause needless wheelspinning, and you could lose control. Don’tuse cruise control on slippery roads.If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optionaltraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See“Traction Control System” in the Index.) When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turnthe cruise control back on.2-39

Setting CI I1.2.Move the cruise controlswitch to ON.Get up to the speedyou want.If you leave your cruise control switch on whenyou're not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you don't want to. Youcould be startled and even lose control. Keepthe cruise control switch OFF until you wantto use it.3. Push in the SETbutton at the end of thelever and release it.The CRUISE light onthe instrument panelwill come on.4. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedSetting the cruise control at a desired speed and thenapplying the brake will end the cruise control function.Once you’re going about25 mph (40 h/h) or more,you can move the cruisecontrol switch from ON toR/A (Resume/Accelerate)for about half a second toreset. This returns you toyour desired preset speed.Increasing Speed While Using Cruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:Use the acceleratorpedal to go to a higherspeed. I sh the button atthe end of the lever, thenrelease the button and1 the accelerator Dedal.You’ll now c2se at thehigher speed.Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer thanhalf a second, the vehicle will accelerate until yourelease the switch or apply the brake. You could bestartled and even lose control. So unless you want to gofaster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.

0 Move the cruise switchfrom ON to R/A. Hold itthere until you reach adesired speed and thenrelease the switch.e -r--- Nhile Using Cruise ControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed while usingcruise control:0 Push in the button atthe end of the leveruntil you reach adesired lower speedthen release it.To increase your speed in very small amounts, move theswitch to R/A for less than half a second and thenrelease it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 h/h) faster.The accelerate feature will only work after you have setthe cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.To slow down in very small amounts, push thebutton for less than half a second. Each time you dothis, you'll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.'ing A Ither Vehicle 'w 1 *. e Using Cr ;e LonerUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slowdown to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHaw well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, you may have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep your speed down. Of course, applying the braketakes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this tobe too much trouble and don’t use cruise control onsteep hills.Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:Step lightly on the brake pedal; or0 Move the cruise switch to OFF. The CRUISE lightwill also go out.Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.LampsH AdlampsThis switch controls these systems:HeadlampsTaillampsParking LampsLicense LampsSidemarker LampsInstrumentPanel Lights

Press the LIGHTS switch to turn the headlamps on.Press it again to turn them off.Press the PARK switch to turn the parking lamps on.Press it again to turn them off. (If the parking lampswere turned on with the PARK switch, they must beturned off with that switch.)Lamps On ReminderIf you leave the manual headlamp or parking lampswitch on, remove the key from the ignition and openthe driver’s door, you will hear a continuous warningchime. The chime will turn off when the lamps areturned off.Daytime Running Lamps (Canada Only)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be’helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset.A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitorsthe exterior light level for the operation of DRL andtwilight sentinel, so be sure it isn’t covered.The DRL system will make your low-beam headlampscome on at reduced brightness in daylight when:The ignition is on,0 The headlamp switch is off, and0 The transaxle is not in PARK (P).When DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps willbe on. The parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker andother lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’tbe lit up either.When it’s dark enough outside, your low-beamheadlamps will change to full brightness. The otherlamps that turn on with your headlamps, will also turnon. When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lampswill turn off, and your low-beam headlamps change tothe reduced brightness of DRL.To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, shift thetransaxle into PARK (P). The DRL will stay off untilyou shift out of PARK (P).To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you areparked, turn off the headlamps and move the twilightsentinel control all the way toward MIN.As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Lamp Monitors (Option)This system wilet you know when certain exteriorlamp bulbs fad. When you start your car, all eight lampscome on briefly to show that'the system is working.When a bulb fails, an indicator will flash for severalseconds and then stay on until the failed bulb is replacedand lit. For example, if a burned out back-up,lamp bulbis replaced, the indicator for back-up lamps will stay onuntil the transaxle is put in REVERSE (R) with theignition ON. The bulbs are monitored only while theyare being used.If you.have recently had a low battery condition or thebattery has been disconnected and reconnected, theindicators will flash when you turn the ignition switch toRUN. Turning on the parking lamps will return the lampmonitor system to normal operation.IndicatorHigh BeamLow BeamLeft TurnRight TunTailParkingstopBack-upBulbs MonitoredBulbs MonitoredBoth Headlamp High BeamsBoth Headlamp Low Beams1 Front Left Turn/Pwk1 Front Right Turnpark2 Tail Only2 Park/TUm4 Rear StopDurn2 Back-upCornering Lamps (Option)The cornering lamps are designea 10 come on when yousignal a turn. This will provide more light for corneringat night.2-45

Twilight Sentinel (Option)Twilight Sentinel turns yourlamps on and off by sensinghow dark it is outside.To operate it, leave the lampswitch off and move thetwilight sentinel control toany position but MIN.Your optional twilightsentinel and daytimerunning lamps work withthe light sensor on top ofthe instrument panel. Don’tcover it up. If you do itwill read “dark” and theheadlamps will come on.[f you move the control all the way to MAX, your lampswill remain on for three minutes after you turn off yourmgine. If you move the control almost all the way in theIther direction, so it’s just on, the lamps will go offpickly when you turn off your engine. You can:hange this delay time from only a few seconds to:hree minutes.Interior Lampsmstrumen’ ?anel Intlsity ControlInstrument panel lightbrightness can be adjustedby moving this leverbetween LO and HI. Interiorcourtesy lamps can beturned on by sliding thelever all the way tothe right.2-46

Time Out Feature (Option)On vehicles equipped with the optional Remote KeylessEntry system, the interior lamps will automatically turnoff after a 10 minute period if a door is left open. Thisfeature is designed to help eliminate battery wear down.Courtesy LampsWhen any door is opened, several lamps go on. Theymake it easy for you to enter and leave the car. You canalso turn these lamps on by sliding the panel lights leverto INT (interior).Delayed Entry LightingWhen you open the door, the interior lamps will comeon. When you close the door with the ignition off, theinterior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until theignition is turned to an on position. Please note thatlocking the doors will override the delayed entrylighting feature and the lamps will turn off right away.Theater DimmingThis feature allows for a three to five-second fade out ofthe courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.Delayed Exit LightingWith this feature, the interior lamps will come on for25 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition.This will give you time to find the door pull handle orlock switches.Illuminated Entry System (Option)When you lift the outside handle of either front door orpress the UNLOCK button on the optional remotekeyless entry transmitter, the lamps inside your vehiclewill turn on. These lamps will turn off after about oneminute. These lamps will also turn off if you start theengine, press the LOCK button on the transmitter oractivate the power door locks.If a door is left ajar, your interior lamps will turn offafter 10 minutes to save your battery.

Perimeter Lighting (Option)When the UNLOCK button on the optional remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed, the headlamps,parking lamps, back-up lamps and cornering lamps willcome on if it is dark enough outside according to thetwilight sentinel.If your vehicle is not equipped with the twilight sentineland the perimeter lighting is active, the lights will comeon whenever the UNLOCK button on the transmitteris pressed.This option can be programmed on or off foreach transmitter.ITo turn the feature off1. Press and hold the door lock switch throughout thisIprocedure. All doors will lock.2. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitter.Perimeter lighting remains on at this time and thehorn will chirp two times.3. Press the instant alarm button on the key transmitteragain. Perimeter lighting is disabled and the hornwill chirp one time.4. Release the door lock switch. The' perimeter lightingoption is now off.To turn the feature on:1. Press and hold the door lock switch throughout thisprocedure. All doors will lock.2. Press the instant alarm button on the key transmitter.Perimeter lighting remains off at this time and the'horn will chup one time.3. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitteragain. Perimeter lighting is now enabled and thehorn will chup two times.4. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lightingoption is now on./-2. -

Front Reading LampsRear Reading LampsLAMP....... ........ .......I I"..".......IlTurn on the front seat reading lamps by pressing theLAMP switch on the overhead console. Press the LAMPswitch again to turn them off.To turn on one of the rear seat reading lamps, push upon the switch above the rear door. To turn off the rearseat reading lamps, pull down on the switch.

~'~ ~~~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~-YTrurkLampWhen you open. the trunk to its full open position, alamp will come on inside the trunk. This lamp willautomatically turn off when the trunk is closed.Battery Rundown' ProtectionThis feature shuts off the courtesy, reading, trunk, glovebox and visor vanity mirror lamps, if any are left on formore than 10 minutes when the ignition is off. This willkeep your battery from running down.-MirrorsInside Manual Day/Night Rearview Mirror. *When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up ordown and side to side. The day/night adjustment allowsyou to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lampsbehind you. Pull the tab forward for daytime use; push itback for night use.

Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror(Option)Your Buick may have an automatic electrochromicday/night rearview mirror.This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you. A photocell on the back of themirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Anotherphotocell built into the mirror surface, senses whenheadlamps are behind you.At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror willgradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take afew seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytimestate when the glare is reduced.Press the button at the base of the mirror to turn on theautomatic feature. The button has an indicator light toshow it is on. Press the button again to turn theautomatic feature off.Time DelayThe automatic mirror has a time delay feature whichprevents unnecessary switching from the night back tothe day position. This delay prevents rapid changing ofthe mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.Reverse Gear Day ModeThe reverse day mode is another important featureof the electrochromic mirror. When you shift intoREVERSE (R), the mirror changes to the day mode.This gives you a bright image in the mirror as youback up.Cleaning the PhotocellsUse a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean thephotocells when necessary.

Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirrorwith Compass (Option)This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare whenset in the M (Mirror) or C/M (Compass/Mirror) positions.This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you. One photocell on the back of themirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Anotherphotocell is built into the mirror surface to senseheadlamps behind you.At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror willgradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take afew seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytimestate when the glare is reduced.Setting the MirrorOFF: This setting turns off the day/night function andcompass. The mirror will stay in the day mode.M: This turns on the day/night portion of the mirror toautomatically reduce glare.C/M: This setting turns on the compass in addition tothe day/night function. The letter or letters displayed inthe top right corner of the mirror indicate the directionin which you are traveling.Time DelayThis feature prevents rapid changing of the mirror fromthe night mode to the day mode as you drive underlights and through traffic.Reverse Gear Day ModeThe reverse mode is another important feature the ofautomatic mirror. When the shift lever is placed inREVERSE (R), the mirror changes to the day mode. Thisgives you a bright image in the mirror as you back up.

use a cotton swab ana glass cleaner to clean thephotocells when necessary.Compass CalibrationOnce the compass is calibrated, it does not need to berecalibrated as long as the mirror is left in your vehicleand the vehicle remains in the same geographical zone.To calibrate the compass:1. Set the switch on the mirror control to C/M.2. Turn the vehicle ignition switch on. The letter Cshould be displayed in the mirror compass window.If not, hold the CAL switch (on the bottom of themirror) for more than 10 seconds, and the letter Cshould appear. To hold in the CAL switch, insert apaper clip into the small hole on the bottom of themirror housing. The display will show a numberfirst, but keep holding until the letter C appears.3. For quick calibration, drive the vehicle in a360-degree circle at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) untilthe display reads a compass direction.For normal calibration, drive the vehicle onyour everyday routine, and the compass willeventually calibrate.Variance is the difference between magnetic north andgeographic north. In some areas, the difference betweenthe two can be great enough to cause false compassreadings. If this happens, follow these instructions to setthe variance for your particular location:1. Find your location on the zone map. Note yourzone number.

2. Hold in the CAL switch (on the bottom of the mirrorhousing) for five seconds until the current zone entrynumber appears on the display. To hold in the CALswitch, insert a paper clip into the small hole on thebottom of the mirror housing.3. Repeatedly press the CAL switch until the numberfor the new zone entry is displayed.Once the desired zone number is displayed, stoppressing the CAL switch and the display will showcompass direction within a few seconds.Your Buick has an electricmirror control located onthe driver’s door armrest.Move the switch in the middle of the control to choosethe right or left mirror. To adjust the mirror, push thearrow control in the direction you want the mirror to go.Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of yourvehicle and the area behind your vehicle.If your Park Avenue is equipped with the optionalmemory seat and mirrors feature, these mirror positions,along with the driver’s seat position can be stored intomemory. See “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index.

Convex Outside MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from thedriver’s seat.I, -A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.Heated Outside Rearview Mirror (Option)If you have this option, the lelt and right outside mirrorsare heated when you activate the rear window defogger.Automatic Dimming Outside RearviewMirror (Option)If you have this option, the driver’s side outside mirrorwill adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. Thisfeature is controlled by the on and off settings on theautomatic electrochromic day/night rearview mirror. See“Automatic Electrochromic Daymight RearviewMirror” earlier in this section.Storage CompartmentsGlove BoxThe glove box is directly in front of the front passengerseat. Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box.To open, pull the latch to the right of the lock.

Installing a Garage Door Onener..lr_ "." . . ... . . ,. ... . . . .The garage door openerstorage area is located inthe headliner.To use your garage door opener in the storage area, seethe following chart to find the proper pin and holecombination. If your garage door opener is not listed onthe chart, you still may be able to find a combinationthat will work. Once you have found a pin and holecombination, follow these instructions:ModelChamberlain505354LMEZ-Lift10893089GenieAT-35AAT-85/AT-95AT-90MAT 85/90Moore-0-MaticDTDT2Ladybug (MIN)Sears5370815371 853738Stanley104710501052107510771079Tru-Guard50TV54TVPin Length-BXXXXXXXXX-CXXXXXXXXXHole Location2--3 4XXXXXXXXXXXXX--XXXX--XXX-

1. To place your garagedoor opener in thestorage area, carefullyopen the cover with ascrewdriver, as shown.Insert a screwdriver inthe slot located abovethe word GARAGE andpry down on the cover.3. Now install theselected pin into thespecified hole on thelever as indicated fromthe chart.2. Next, carefully pry thepanel out of the slotsin the cover todisassemble the paneland lever.

6. If the adhesive stripswon’t hold your openerin place, tie down loopsmay be used.4. While holding the panel and lever, place the panelover your garage door opener so that the button isover the pin.5. Remove the backing from the adhesive strips onthe panel and place your garage door opener onthe panel.7. Place the tabs from thepanel into the slots onthe cover so that pivotsare positioned as shown.

IFront Storage Armrest8. Snap the panel with your garage door opener intothe cover.If your garage door opener doesn’t work after it isinstalled, another pin and hole combination will have tobe tried. If the opener doesn’t turn off after the lever isreleased, the pin will have to be filed down.The armrest between the front seats opens into a storagearea. To open it, pull up on the lever at the front edge.Inside are cupholders which can be rotated forward foruse with the cover closed. There is also a removablecoinholder and a storage area for cassette tapes andcompact discs.Rear Storage ArmrestYour vehicle’s rear seat armrest may open into a storagearea. To open it, pull up on the lever at the front edge.Inside are cupholders which can be rotated forward foruse with the cover closed.2-59

Convenience IYour vehicle has a convenience net. You’ll see it justinside the back wall of the trunk.Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It canhelp keep them from falling over during sharp turns orquick starts and stops.The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in thetrunk as far forward as you can.You can unhook the net so that it willyou’re not using it.lie flat when2-60

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterFront AshtrayThe front ashtray may be removed for cleaning. Toremove, grasp the sides and pull forward.Rear AshtrayTo remove the rear ashtray, open the lid and ease theashtray upward until the edge can be grasped to pull theashtray up and out.NOTICE:Cigarette LighterThere are cigarette lighters near the front and rearashtrays. To use one, push it in all the way and let go.When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.NOTICE:If you hold a cigarette lighter in with your handwhile it is heating, it won’t be able to back awayfrom the heating element when it’s ready. Thatcan make it overheat, damaging the lighter andthe heating element.Don’t put papers or other flammable thingsinto your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them, causinga damaging fire.

Illuminated Visor Vanity MirrorTo block out glare, swing down the visors. Each sunvisor can be removed from the center mount and movedto the side, while the auxiliary sun visor remains toblock glare from the front.To extend the visor at the sides, pull out thesunshade extension.When you open-this visor vanity mirror by pulling up,the lamps turn on. \ 'The brightness of the lamps can be adjusted by slidingthe switch. The Park Avenue Ultra also has visor vanitymirrors for the rear seat passengers.

Rear License Plate HolderTo use the rear license plate holder, open the trunk lidand slide your license plate into the slot. Always closethe trunk to prevent theft of the plate.Astroroof (Option)If you have theexpress-open astroroofoption, the switch is on theroof between the sun visors.It will open the astroroofwhen in retained accessorypower or when the ignitionis on.To open the glass panel and sunshade, press the switchrearward and release. The astroroof will openautomatically to the full open position. To stop the panelin a partially open position, press the switch again at thedesired point. To continue to open fully, press the switchrearward again and release. The sunshade can also beopened manually.To close the glass panel, press and hold the switchforward. The sunshade must be manually closed.Once the astroroof is closed, it can be opened to a ventposition. Press the switch forward to vent. To close,press the switch rearward. The sunshade must be openedand closed manually for vent operation.Assist HandlesA folding handle over each rear door and the frontpassenger’s door can be used to help you get in or outof your Buick.2-63

Instrument Panel2-64

1. Air Outlet2. Headlamps Switch3. Parking Lamps Switch4. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever5. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever6. Instrument Cluster/Gages7. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch8. Audio System9. Passenger’s Side SRS (Air Bag)10. Glove Box11. Climate Control System12. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter13. Ignition Switch14. Driver’s Side SRS (Air Bag)15. Traction Control Switch16. Fuel Button17. Trunk Release18. Hood Release

Instrument Panel ClusterYour Buick is equipped with one of the following instrument panel clusters. It includes indicator warning lights andgages that are explained on the following pages. Be sure to read about those that apply to the instrument cluster foryour vehicle.c3Standard Cluster

0021noGage Cluster

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Yourodometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers(used in Canada).Your Buick has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you seebright silver lines between the numbers, probablysomeone has tried to turn it back. The numbers may notbe true.You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs anew odometer installed. If possible, the new one has tobe set to the same reading the old one had. If it can’t be,then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileage reading and whenthe new one was installed.Trip OdometerA trip odometer can tell how far you’ve driven sinceyou last set it back to zero. To reset it, push the button.Tachometer (Option)43 \ I /2 ‘ /\.F==ORPM X 1000NOTICE:57The tachometer on theoptional gage cluster tellsybu how fast the engine isrunning. It displays enginespeed in thousands ofrevolutions per minute(rpm).Do not operate the engine with the tachometer inthe red area, or engine damage may occur.

Warning Lights, Gages and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages that maybe on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save you orothers from injury.Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, some warninglights come on briefly when you start the engine just to letyou know they’re working. If you are familiar with thissection, you should not be alarmed when this happens.Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and evendangerous. So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime willcome on for about eight seconds to remind people tofasten their safety belts.The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor about 70 seconds. If thedriver’s belt is alreadybuckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks theair bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem. The systemcheck includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the air bag system, see “AirBag” in the Index.Battery Warning LightVOLTAI RBAGYou will see this light flashfor a few seconds when youturn your ignition to RUNor START. Then the lightshould go out. This meansthe system is ready.When you turn the key to RUN, one of these lights willcome on briefly, to show that your alternator and batterycharging systems are working. If the light stays on, youneed service, and you should take your Buick to thedealer at once. To save your battery until you get there,turn off all accessories and set your air system OFF. toIf the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when youstart your vehicle, or stays on, or comes on when youare driving, your air bag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

Voltage Indicator (Option)8WIf you have the optionalgage cluster, this gageshows voltage in theelectrical system. Thenormal range is I 1 to18 15 volts.Brake System Warning LightIf the warning light comes on, there could be a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspected right away.This light should come onwhen you turn the ignitionkey to START. If it doesn’tcome on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warnyou if there’s a problem.If the reading stays outside the normal range, or thebattery warning light comes on, have your Buick dealercheck the electrical system.If the light and chime come on while you are driving,pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “TowingYour Vehicle” in the Index.)2-71

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning LightYour brake system may not be working properlyif the brake system warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning light on can leadto an accident. If the light is still on after you’vepulled off the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light will comeon when you start yourengine and may stay onfor several seconds.That’s normal.When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakeSoesn’t release fully. If you try to drive off with the?arking brake set, a chime will also come on until yourelease the parking brake. If the light and chime stay onafter your parking brake is fully released, it means younave a brake problem.2-72If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. Or, if the lightcomes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possibleand turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while you’re driving, your Buick needs service. Ifthe regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you stillhave brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with yourregular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light”earlier in this part.The anti-lock brake system warning light should comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key RUN. to If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System Warning Light(Option)TRACTIONOFFThis warning light shouldcome on briefly as you startthe engine. If the warninglight doesn’t come on then,have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there’sa problem.If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, theremay be a problem with your traction control system andyour vehicle may need service. When this warning lightis on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.The traction control system warning light may come onfor the following reasons:If you turn the system off by pressing the buttonlocated on the instrument panel, left of the steeringcolumn, the warning light will come on and stay on.To turn the system back on, press the button again.The warning light should go off. (See “TractionControl System” in the Index for more information.)0 If there’s a brake system problem that is specificallyrelated to traction control, the traction control systemwill turn off and the warning light will come on. Ifyour brakes begin to overheat, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the warning light will comeon until your brakes cool down.If the traction control system is affected by anengine-related problem, the system will turn off andthe warning light will come on.If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time when thesystem is turned on, your vehicle needs service.2-73

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light-hTEMPOne of these lights will come on to tell you that yourengine coolant has overheated or your radiator coolingfans are not working. If you have been operating your,vehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn the engineoff as soon as possible. IThe section “Problems on the Road,” in thismanual explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.Engine Coolant Temperature Gage (Option)If’ you have the gage cluster,you have a gage that showsthe engine coolanttemperature in degreesFahrenheit. Canadianinstrument panels measurethe coolant temperature indegrees Celsius. -If the gagepointer moves into the redarea, your engine is too hot!That reading means ,the same thing as the warning light.It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If youhave been operating.your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off the road, stop yourvehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.The section “Problems’ on the Road,” in thismanual explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.2-74

Low Coolant Warning LightCOOLANTLOWWhen this light comes on,the cooling system is low oncoolant. As a bulb check, itwill come on when theignition in the RUNposition and then go off.Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)CHECKYour Buick is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.If the coolant level is low, the light will come back on. Ifthis happens, see “Engine Coolant” in the Index forproper cooling system fill.After the coolant level is returned to its proper level, theLOW COOLANT light will go off after 20 seconds orremain off on the next ignition cycle.This system is called OBD I1 (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced byEnhanced Diagnostics.) The CHECK ENGINE lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem and serviceis required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent, which mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle. Thissystem is also designed to assist your service technicianin correctly diagnosing any malfunction.2-75

NOTICE:If you keep driving your vehicle with this lighton, after a while, your emission controls may notwork as well, your fuel economy may not be asgood and your engine may not run as smoothly.This could lead to costly repairs that may not becovered by your warranty.This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine is notrunning. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.This light will also come on during a malfunction in oneof two ways:Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions andmay damage the emission control system on yourvehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand service is required.Light On Steady -- An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis andservice may be required.If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:0 Reduce vehicle speed.0 Avoid hard accelerations.Avoid steep uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo beinghauled as soon as it is possible.If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn thekey off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine.If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is OnSteady” following. If the light is still flashing follow theprevious steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer orqualified service center for service.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.Are you low on fuel?As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine maynot run as efficiently as designed since small amounts ofair are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. Thesystem can detect this. Adding fuel should correct thiscondition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. Itwill take a few driving trips to turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause yourengine not to run as efficiently as designed. You maynotice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when. youput the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause the lightto turn on.If you experience this condition, change the fuel brandyou use. It will require at least one full tank of theproper fuel to turn the light off.If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,have your dealer or qualified service center check thevehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.2-77

Oil Pressure Light/GageFZOILIf your car has the optional gage cluster, the oil pressuregage shows the engine oil pressure in pounds per squareinch (psi). Canadian vehicles indicate pressure inkilopascals (Pa).There are three ways the oil pressure light can come onbriefly, which are normal and don’t show a problem.They are:0 The light comes on when you turn your key to RUN.It goes off once you turn the key to START. That’sjust a check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t,be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn youif something goes wrong.If you’re “idling” at a stop sign, the light may blinkon and then off.If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a moment.When this light comes on and stays on, it means oil isn’tgoing through your engine properly. You could be lowon oil, or you might have some other oil problem. Seeyour dealer for service.2-78

Check Oil Level Light (Option)Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced.CHECKOIL LEVELThe CHECK OIL LEVELlight comes on for threeseconds as a bulb checkeach time the ignition key isturned to the RUN position.If the light doesn’t come on,have your vehicle serviced.NOTICE:Damage to your engine from neglected oilproblems can be costly and is not covered byyour warranty.If the engine oil is more than one quart low, the lightwill come on briefly, then go off for 15-25 seconds, andthen come back on for 20-40 seconds.However, the system will not register low engine oil if ithas not been more than eight minutes since the enginewas last shut off.If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light comes back on, theengine oil should be checked at the dipstick thenbrought up to the proper level if necessary. See “EngineOil” in the Index.2-79

Change Oil Soon Light (Option)CHANGEOIL SOONThis light is activated by theEngine Oil Life MonitorSystem. The systemdetermines the condition ofthe engine oil and lets youknow when the oil shouldbe changed. (See “EngineOil” in the Index.)It does this by using information about engine speed(revolutions per minute), coolant temperature andvehicle speed. The system uses this data to determinehow much the oil has degraded.When to change your oil depends on driving habits andconditions because these directly affect engine speed,coolant temperature and vehicle speed. Because of this,the CHANGE OIL SOON light may come on as early as2,000 miles or less for harsh conditions.The CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on for fiveseconds as a bulb check each time the ignition keyis turned to the RUN position. It will stay on for60 seconds once 90% of the oil life has been usedand each time the engine is started after that. If theCHANGE OIL SOON light is on continuously, thereis a problem with the Oil Life Monitor System andservice is required.After changing the engine oil, the system should bereset. This will cause the CHANGE OIL SOON light tobe lit again for the bulb check period of three seconds.2-80

Door Ajar Light (Option)DOORAJARWhen the ignition is on, thislight will stay on until allthe doors are closed andThe reset button is in the glove box. With the ignitionkey in the RUN position, push the reset button.Hold it in for at least five seconds, but not more than60 seconds. After five seconds, the CHANGE OILSOON light will flash four times and then go off.This indicates that the Oil Life Monitor System hasbeen reset.Trunk Ajar Light (Option)TRUNKAJARIf this light stays on withthe ignition on, it meansthat the trunk lid is open ornot completely latched.

Fuel GageIt takes more (or less) gas to fill up than the gageindicated. For example, the gage may have indicatedhalf full, but it took more (or less) than half of thetank’s capacity to fill it.The gage moves a little when you turn a corner,speed up, or stop your vehicle.When you turn the engine off, the gage doesn’t go allthe way back to empty (E).Low Fuel Light (OptioYour fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in yourtank. It works only when the ignition is on. When theindicator nears empty (E), you still have a little fuel left.You need to get more fuel right away.Here are some concerns owners have had about the fuelgage. All these situations are normal and indicatenothing wrong with the fuel gage:0 At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before thegage reads full (F).I 1If your Buick has thisoption, a yellow light nearthe fuel gage will go onwhen you are low on fuel.You should get more fuel assoon as you can.2-82

NOTES

2-84

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio SystemsIn this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfortcontrol systems and audio systems offered with yourBuick. Be sure to read about the particular systemsupplied with your vehicle.Comfort ControlsThis section tells you how to operate your comfortcontrols. Your comfort control system usesozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.With these systems, you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation in your Buick. Your vehiclealso has a flow-through ventilation system describedlater in this section.Electronic Touch Climate ControlIf your Buick has this climate control system, thefollowing information tells you how it works.

The FAN control is used to select the speed of theblower fan and the force of air you want. There are fourspeeds to choose from. Moving the lever between LOWand HIGH will decrease or increase the fan speed. Thefan will be off when the system is off.This lever regulates the temperature of the air comingthrough the system. Move the TEMPERATURE lever tochange the temperature of the air coming through youroutlets. Move the lever between COOL and WARM tolower or raise the temperature.de Cc. -The buttons on your system allow you to choose settingsto deliver air through lower, middle or windshield outlets.RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of air orcool the air in your vehicle. To turn off RECIRC, pressthe button again. If you select FRONT defrost orBLEND while RECIRC is selected, the system willautomatically turn off RECIRC to prevent fogging.VENT This setting directs airflow through the middleinstrument panel outlets. The air conditioningcompressor is not working when VENT is selected.HTR: This button directs air out of the heater outlets.Most of the air will come from the floor outlets whilesome of it will flow through the windshield and sidewindow outlets. The air conditioning compressor is notworking when HTR is selected.BLEND: When BLEND is selected the airflow will besplit between the windshield and the floor outlets. Theair conditioning compressor will be operating.FRONT This setting directs most of the airflow towardthe windshield.OFF: The ventilation system always allows fresh air toflow through your Buick when the vehicle is moving.The system will try to keep the air at a previouslychosen temperature. When the system is off, the blowerfan is also off.MAX: This setting directs airflow through the middleinstrument panel outlets.NORM: This setting cools the air entering your vehicleand directs it through the middle instrument panel outlets.BI-LEV: This setting directs warm air to the floor andcooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets.

Dual Automatic ComforTempClimate Control (Option)If your Buick has the dual automatic comfortempclimate control option, the following information tellsyou how it works.You will hear a beep each time a button is pushed and asmall light on the button will indicate which buttons areactive. The lights are on all buttons except TEMP, FANand AIR FLOW. The display will show fan speed,comfort level setting and airflow direction for a fewseconds whenever AUTO is selected, and then it willdisplay the outside temperature. The outside temperaturereading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving.During stops, the display shows the previoustemperature for best accuracy and system control.If the display is flashing after the climate control systemis started, there is a problem with the system and youshould see your dealer for service.Sun and temperature sensors automatically adjust the airtemperature, the airflow direction and the fan speed tomaintain your comfort setting. The system may supplycooler air to the side towards the sun. Be careful not toput anything over the sensors on top of the dash.

Temperature ButtonTo adjust the comfort level you want maintained insidethe vehicle, push the TEMP button. If you want awarrner comfort level, push the red arrow. If you want acooler comfort level, push the blue arrow. Your comfortsetting is shown in the display.Fan ButtonThe speed of the blower fan is controlled automaticallyif you have the system set for AUTO. Pressing theFAN button will display and hold the current blowerfan setting.If you want the blower fan to run at a lower speed, pushthe bottom of the FAN button. The fan speed willdecrease with every push of the button until the lowestspeed is reached. If you want to increase the fan speed,push the top of the FAN button. Notice the fanindicators on the display.Mode ControlsPress the AIR FLOW button to deliver air through thefloor, middle or windshield outlets. The system will stayin the selected mode until the AUTO button is pushed.Press the up arrow on the AIR FLOW button to cyclethrough the available modes.3-4Automatic OperationPress the AUTO button when you want the system toautomatically adjust to changes in the temperature insidethe vehicle, the outside temperature and the sun load onthe vehicle. When the system iset for automaticoperation, air will come from the floor, middle orwindshield outlets depending on the temperature insidethe vehicle, the outside temperature and sun load. Fanspeed will vary as the system gets to and maintains thecomfort setting you have selected through the use of theTEMP button.To find your comfort setting, start with the system inAUTO mode and the TEMP button adjusted to a displayof 75°F (24"C), give the vehicle about 20 minutes tostabilize, and adjust your comfort setting if necessary, byusing the TEMP button. The display will show thecomfort setting for a few seconds and then it willdisplay the outside temperature. If you want to see yourcurrent automatic fan speed, airflow direction andcomfort setting, press the AUTO button.In cold weather, the system will delay turning on thefan, to avoid blowing cold air. The length of the delaydepends on the engine coolant temperature and theoutside temperature. Pushing the FAN, AIR FLOW orFRONT buttons will override this delay, turn off theAUTO setting and change the fan speed.

Manual OperationYou may also manually adjust the air delivery orfan speed.AIR FLOW: This button is used to change the directionof the arflow. The airflow choices available are FLOOR,FLOOR-MID, MID and WINDSHIELD-FLOOR. If thesystem is set for AUTO, pressing the AIR FLOW buttonwill display the current airflow direction and the comfortsetting. Press the AIR FLOW up or down button again tochange the direction of the airflow.If the AIR FLOW up button is selected while in theFRONT defrost mode, the system will direct the airtoward the WINDSHIELD-FLOOR. If the AIR FLOWdown button is selected while in the FRONT defrostmode, the system will direct the air toward the FLOOR,and the FRONT defrost mode will cancel. Notice thearrows in the display.OFF: If the passenger comfort control is turned on, itcan be turned off by pressing the OFF button once.Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off themain system. Turning off the main system causes the fanto turn off and the airflow to be directed to the FLOOR.The system will still try to keep the interior of thevehicle at the previous chosen comfort setting. Theoutside temperature will show on the display when thesystem is OFF.The ventilation system always allows fresh air to flowthrough your Buick when the vehicle is moving evenwith the system in the OFF mode.VENT The VENT button allows outside air to flowthrough your Buick without the air conditioningcompressor working. Selecting VENT and the AUTObutton at the same time allows the system to controlautomatically without the use of the air conditioningcompressor or the use of the RECIRC mode. To turn offthe VENT selection, push the VENT button again.RECIRC: When RECIRC is selected, the system willlimit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle.This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interiorof the vehicle quickly or limit the amount of outside airentering your vehicle for some other reason. RECIRCand AUTO may be selected at the same time. Thesystem will remain in RECIRC for 12 minutes oruntil the ignition is turned off, then the system willreturn back to the previously selected mode. RECIRCcan be selected in all manual airflow modes exceptFRONT defrost. RECIRC cannot be selected withthe VENT button.3-5

FRONT This selection is used to defrost thewindshield by directing the airflow toward the windshield.If FRONT is selected while in the AUTO mode, the fanspeed and the air temperature from the front defroster willvary. If a manual fan speed setting is selected, the fanspeed will remain at that selection until another fan speedselection is made or the AUTO mode is selected. To turnoff FRONT, press the AUTO or AIR FLOW button.FRONT defrost will work better if any ice or snow iscleared from the hood and the air inlet area between thebase of the windshield and the hood.Air Condi,,.On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for yourvehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closedfor the air conditioner to work its best.If you have the electronic touch system, for quickcool-down on very hot days, use MAX with thetemperature and fan speed adjusted to COOL and HIGH.For normal cooling on hot days, use NORM and adjust thetemperature and fan speed for your comfort. If REClRC isselected while in the NORM air conditioning mode, thesystem works like MAX and recirculates the air. UseBI-LEV to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air tothe middle instrument panel outlets.If you have the dual automatic comfortemp system andon very hot days using the AUTO mode, the system willautomatically enter the RECIRC mode and thetemperature door will be positioned at the full coldposition for maximum cooling. If the system is not inthe AUTO mode, RECIRC should be selected to providemaximum cooling. You can choose the extreme comfortsetting of 60°F (16"C), but the system will not cool anyfaster by choosing the extreme comfort setting.When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes noticeslight changes in your vehicle's engine speed and power.This is normal because the system is designed to cycle thecompressor on and off to keep the desired temperature.

HeatingIf you have the electronic touch system, on cold days,use HTR with the TEMPERATURE lever towardWARM. If you have the dual automatic comfortempsystem, press AUTO and adjust the temperature bypressing the TEMP up or down arrow. You may alsoadjust the dual automatic comfortemp system manuallyby pressing the AIR FLOW button until FLOORappears. Again, adjust the temperature by pressing theTEMP up or down arrow.With each system, outside air will be brought in and sentthrough the floor outlets. The heater works best if youkeep your windows closed.Ventilation SystemFor mild outside temperatures when little heating orcooling is needed, use VENT (on the electronic touchsystem or manual operation of the dual automaticcornfortemp system) to direct outside air through yourvehicle. Air will flow through the middle instrumentpanel outlets.Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system suppliesoutside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When thevehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flowthrough by selecting any air choice (except the rearwindow defogger) and any fan speed.3-7

Adjust the direction ofairflow by moving thelouvered vents.If you have the rear passenger comfortemp option,you can adjust the direction of the airflow to the rearseating area.

Ventilation Tips0000Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow orany other obstruction such as leaves. The heater anddefroster will work better, reducing the chance offogging your windows.When you enter a vehicle with the electronic touchsystem in cold weather, select HTR to supply airthrough the floor outlets. Then move the FAN leverto HIGH for a few moments before driving away.This will blow moist air from the intake outletstoward the floor, not the windshield. It reduces thechance of fogging your windows. If you have thedual automatic comfortemp system, the AUTOsetting will do this for you. Manual operation of theautomatic comfortemp system in the FLOOR modewill also supply air through the floor outlets.Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects.This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.When the engine idles for a long time, the exteriortemperature sensor may cause the system to blow airthat is too cool. Once the vehicle is moving again,the system will try to maintain the set temperatureinside your vehicle.0 When you start your vehicle and the EXT displayflashes (dual automatic comfortemp system only) forsome time, the system may need repair. See yourBuick dealer.Defogging and DefrostingOn cool but humid days, use FRONT to keep thewindshield and side windows clear and to quicklyremove fog, frost or ice from the windshield.If you have the the electronic touch system, adjust theTEMPERATURE lever toward WARM and the FANlever toward HIGH.If you have the dual automatic cornfortemp system,while in the AUTO mode, the fan speed will vary. If amanual fan speed setting is selected, the fan speed willremain at that selection until the engine is turned off oranother selection has been made. To turn off FRONT,press AUTO or AIR FLOW.3-9

Rear Window Defogger (Option)EThe lines you see on therear window warm theglass. Press this button tostart warming your window.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decalsacross the defogger grid on the rear window.I NOTICE:Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharpon the inside of the rear window. If you do, youcould cut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.After 10 minutes it will turn off by itse lf, or by press ingthe button during the heating cycle will turn it off. If youneed additional warming time, push the button again.The system will then operate for five minutes beforegoing off by itself.3-10

Passenger ControlIf you have the dualautomatic cornfortempsystem, the front seatpassenger can controlthe air temperature intheir seating area.Steering Wheel Controls for ClimateControl (Option)If your vehicle has thisfeature, you can control thetemperature function byusing the button on yoursteering wheel. Press theTEMP up arrow to increasethe temperature and theTEMP down arrow todecrease the temperature.This can be set up to 5 O F (- 15 O C) cooler or warmer thanthe primary setting. You can activate this feature bypressing the WARM or COOL buttons on the passengerdoor. The indicator lights above the control will showthe difference from the main temperature setting.If the passenger control has been turned on, it can beturned off by pressing the OFF button once. Pressing theOFF button a second time will turn off the main system.

Audio SystemsYour Delco@ audio system has been designed to operateeasily and give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourselfwith it first. Find out what your Delco system can doand how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’regetting the most out of the advanced engineering thatwent into it.Setting the ClockPress and hold HRS until the correct hour appears. Pressand hold MIN until the correct minute appears.You may set the clock with the ignition off if youpress RECALL first and follow the same proceduredescribed above.AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape PlayerPlaying the RadioVOLUME: Turn this knob to turn the system on andoff. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall thestation being played or to display the clock. To changewhat is normally shown on the display (station or time),press the knob until you see the display you want, thenhold the knob until the display flashes. If you press the3-12

knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for afew seconds.Finding a StationAM-FM: Press the lower knob to select AM, FM1 orFM2. The display shows your selection.TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.SEEK: Press the forward or backward arrow to go tothe next higher or lower station. The sound will bemuted while seeking.SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two secondsand SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN tolisten to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stopscanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. You can set up to18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).1. Press AM-FM to select the band.2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.4. The sound will mute. When it returns, release thebutton. Whenever you press that numbered button,the station you set will return.P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of yourpreset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go tothe first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then goon to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stopscanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.Setting the ToneBASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease bass.TREB: Press this button lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease treble.Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.Adjusting the SpeakersBAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to movethe sound to the left or right speakers. Use the middleposition to balance these speakers.FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to movethe sound to the front or rear speakers. Use the middleposition to balance these speakers.

--, -_-v b - ---I”- -- I‘l’he longer side with the tape visible should face to theright. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape willbegin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT toremove the tape and start over.While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,BAL, TREB and BASS controls just as you do for theradio. Other controls may have different functions whena tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow toshow which side of the tape is playing.If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio isoff, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that thecassette tape adapter kits for portable compact discplayers may not work in your cassette player. Theseadapters can cause an error message on the display, andthe adapter cassette could be ejected.Your tape bias is set automatically.SEEK: Press the forward or backward arrow to searchfor the next or previous selection on the tape. Your tapemust have at least three seconds of silence between eachselection for SEEK to work. The sound will be mutedwhile seeking.44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio willplay while the tape reverses.bb (4): Press this button to advance quickly to anotherpart of the tape. Press the button again to return to playingspeed. The radio will play while the tape advances.SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of thetape that is playing.00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.The display will show either OFF or ON for a fewseconds when you press the button.Dolby@ Noise Reduction is manufactured under alicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radiowill play.CLN: This message may appear on the display. If itdoes, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itwill still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes and player.See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT forfive seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio willdisplay --- to show the indicator was reset.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Playerand Automatic Tone ControlPlaying the RadioVOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on andoff. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the stationbeing played or to display the clock. To change what isnormally shown on the display (station or time), pressthis button until you see the display you want, then holdthe button until the display flashes. If you press thebutton when the ignition is off, the clock will show for afew seconds.Finding a StationAM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2.The display shows your selection.TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to chooseradio stations.SEEK: Press the up or down arrows to go to thenext higher or lower station. The sound will be mutedwhile seeking.SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two secondsand SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN tolisten to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stopscanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. You can set up to18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2).1. Press AM-FM to select the band.2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.3. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.5. The sound will mute. When it returns, releasethe button. Whenever you press that numberedbutton, the station you set will return and theTONE you selected will be automatically selectedfor that button.P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of yourpreset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go tothe first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then goon to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stopscanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.AUTO SET Press this button and the system will seekand set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AMstations on your preset buttons (depending on whichband (AM or FM) you are listening to). To return to thestations you manually set, press AUTO SET again.tting the ToneBASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease bass.TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease treble.Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset trebleand bass equalization settings designed for classical,pop, rock, jazz, talk and countrylwestern stations.CLASS will appear on the display when you first pressTONE. Each time you press it, another setting willappear on the display. Press it again after C & Wappears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control willreturn to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you usethe TREB and BASS knobs, control will return to themand MANUAL will appear.sting iakersBAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Usethe middle position to balance these speakers.FADE: Turn the knob to move the sound to the front or reaspeakers. Use the middle position to balance these speakers.Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.

Playing a Cassette TapeThe longer side with the tape visible should face to theright. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape willbegin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT toremove the tape and start over.While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,BAL, TREB and BASS controls just as you do for theradio. Other controls may have different functions whena tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow toshow which side of the tape is playing.If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio isoff, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that thecassette tape adapter kits for portable compact discplayers may not work in your cassette player. Theseadapters can cause an error message on the display, andthe adapter cassette could be ejected.Your tape bias is set automatically.PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previousselection on the tape. Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for PREV towork. The sound will be muted while seeking.NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the nextselection on the tape. Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for NEXT towork. The sound will be muted while seeking.The SEEK up and down arrows will also find theprevious and next selections on the tape.44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio willplay while the tape reverses.bb (4): Press this button to advance quickly to anotherpart of the tape. Press the button again to return toplaying speed. The radio will play while the tapeadvances.SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of thetape that is playing.00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.The double-D symbol will appear on the display.Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.3-17

AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tapeis in the player.SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tapefunction when the radio is on. TAPE with an arrow willappear on the display when the tape is active.EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radiowill play.CLN: This message may appear on the display. If itdoes, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itwill still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. Afteryou clean the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio willdisplay --- to show the indicator was reset.AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Playerand Automatic Tone ControlPlaying the RadioVOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on andoff. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.

RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the stationbeing played or to display the clock. To change what isnormally shown on the display (station or time), pressthe button until you see the display you want, then holdthe button until the display flashes. If you press thebutton when the ignition is off, the clock will show for afew seconds.,a!AM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.The display shows your selection.TUNE: Press the up or down arrows to choose radio stations.SEEK: Press the up or down arrows to go to thenext higher or lower station. The sound will be mutedwhile seeking.SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two secondsand SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN tolisten to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stopscanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. You can set up to18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).1.2.3.4.5.Press AM-FM to select the band.Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.The sound will mute. When it returns, release thebutton. Whenever you press that numbered button, thestation you set will return and the TONE you selectedwill be automatically selected for that button.P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of yourpreset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go tothe first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then goon to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stopscanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.3-19

I_r____the TC-.b --d ‘-7BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease bass.TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease treble.Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset trebleand bass equalization settings designed for classical,pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.CLASS will appear on the display when you first pressTONE. Each time you press it, another setting willappear on the display. Press it again after C & Wappears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control willreturn to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you usethe TREB and BASS knobs, control will return to themand MANUAL will appear.BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn thisknob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Usethe middle position to balance these speakers.FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn thisknob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.Use the middle position to balance these speakers.d a Corn1Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radiois off, first press EJECT or RECALL.If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear onthe display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display.When things get back to normal, the disc should play. Ifthe disc comes out, it could be that:0 The disc is upside down.0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour andtry again.)RECALL: Press this button to see which track isplaying. Press it again within five seconds to see howlong it has been playing. To change what is normallyshown on the display (track or elapsed time), press thebutton until you see the display you want, then hold thebutton until the display flashes.

PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of thecurrent track if more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving back through the disc.The sound will be muted while seeking.NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving forward through the disc.The sound will be muted while seeking.The.SEEK down and up arrows will also find theprevious and next selections on the disc.44 (3): Press and hold this button to return to a passagequickly. You will hear sound.(4): Press and hold this button to advance to apassage quickly. You will hear sound.RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order.AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a discis in the player.If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn on theignition or system, the disc will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last-selected audio source.SOURCE: Press this knob to change to the discfunction when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted,the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then thedisc will stop playing and the radio will play. PressSOURCE again to play a disc again. CD PLAY willshow on the display.EJECT Press this button to remove the disc. The radiowill play.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape andCompact Disc PIayers and AutomaticTone ControlPlaying the RadioVOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on andoff. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the stationbeing played or to display the clock. To change what isnormally shown on the display (station or time), pressthe RECALL button until you see the display you want,then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clockwill show for a few seconds.Finding a StationAM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2.The display shows your selection.TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to chooseradio stations.SEEK: Press the up or down arrows to go to the nexthigher or lower station. The sound will be muted whileseeking.SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two secondsand SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN tolisten to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stopscanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.3-22

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. You can set up to18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2).1.2.3.4.5.Press AM-FM to select the band.Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.The sound will mute. When it returns, release thebutton. Whenever you press that numbered button,the station you set will return and the TONEyou selected will be automatically selected forthat button.P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of yourpreset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go tothe first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then goon to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stopscanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seekand set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AMstations on your preset buttons. To return to the stationsyou manually set, press AUTO SET again.Setting the ToneBASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease bass. Push the knob back inwhen you are not using it.TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to increase or decrease treble. Push the knob backin when you are not using it.TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset trebleand bass equalization settings designed for classical,pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.CLASS will appear on the display when you first pressTONE. Each time you press it, another setting willappear on the display. Press it again after C & Wappears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control willreturn to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you usethe TREB and BASS knobs, control will return to themand MANUAL will appear.

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Usethe middle position to balance these speakers. Push theknob back in when you are not using it.FADE: Press this button lightly so it extends. Turn theknob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.Use the middle position to balance these speakers. Pushthe knob back in when you are not using it.The longer side with the tape visible should face to theright. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape willbegin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT toremove the tape and start over.While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,BAL, TREB and BASS controls just as you do for theradio. Other controls may have different functions whena tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow toshow which side of the tape is playing.If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio isoff, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that thecassette tape adapter kits for portable compact discplayers may not work in your cassette player. Theseadapters can cause an error message on the display, andthe adapter cassette could bejected.Your tape bias is set automatically.PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previousselection on the tape. Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for PREV towork. The sound will be muted while seeking.NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the nextselection on the tape. Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for NEXT towork. The sound will be muted while seeking.The SEEK down and up arrows will also find theprevious and next selections on.the tape.44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio willplay while the tape reverses.(4): Press this button to advance quickly to anotherpart of the tape. Press the button again to return to playingspeed. The radio will play while the tape advances.SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of thetape that is playing.

SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape ordisc function when the radio is on. If both a tape and adisc are installed, the system will first go to tape play;TAPE will appear on the display. If SOURCE is pressedagain, the system will go to disc play; CD will appear onthe display.EJECT The system has two EJECT buttons. Press thebutton near the CD slot to remove a disc. Press the buttonnear the tape slot to remove a tape. The radio will play.CLN: This message may appear on the display. If itdoes, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itwill still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. Afteryou clean the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio willdisplay --- to show the indicator was reset.Your cassette tape player automatically reducesbackground noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.You may turn Dolby off by pressing the number six preset.Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation,Playing a Campact DiscInsert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. rneplayer will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radiois off, first press EJECT or RECALL.If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,the disc may not play and an error code may appear onthe display. Press RECALL to take the error code off thedisplay. When things get back to normal, the disc shouldplay. If the disc comes out, it could be that:0 The disc is upside down.0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.0 It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour andtry again.)RECALL: Press this button to see which track isplaying. Press it again within five seconds to see howlong it has been playing. To change what is normallyshown on the display (track or elapsed time), press theRECALL button until you see the display you want,then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.3-25

PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving back through the disc.The sound will be muted while seeking.NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving forward through the disc.The sound will be muted while seeking.The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the.previous and next selections on the disc.44 (3): Press and hold this button to return to a passagequickly. You will hear sound.(4): Press and hold this button to advance to apassage quickly. You will hear sound.RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order.AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a discis in the player.If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn on theignition or system, the disc will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last-selected audio source.SOURCE: Press this button to change to the discfunction when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted,the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then thedisc will stop playing and the radio will play. PressSOURCE again to play a disc again. CD PLAY willshow on the display.EJECT Press this button to remove the disc. The radiowill play.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radiofunctions whenever battery power is removed.If THEFTLOCK is active, the THEFTLOCK indicatorwill flash when the ignition is OFF.The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used orignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and theradio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK isactivated, your radio will not operate if stolen.When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will. displayLOC to indicate a locked condition anytime batterypower is removed. If your battery loses power for anyreason, you must unlock the radio with the secret codebefore it will operate.Activating the Theft-DeternFeatureThe instructions which follow explain how to enter yoursecret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It isrecommended that you read through all nine stepsbefore starting the procedure.NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapsebetween any steps, the radio automatically reverts totime and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.1. Write down any three or four-digit number from000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate fromthe vehicle.2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUNposition.3. Turn the radio off.4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them downuntil --- shows on the display. Next you will use thesecret code number which you have written down.5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agreewith your code.7. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agreewith your code.8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that thecode matches the secret code you have written down.The display will show REP to let you know that youneed to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm yoursecret code.9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will showSEC to let you know that your radio is secure.

Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After aPower LossEnter your secret code as follows; pause no more than15 seconds between steps:1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agreewith your code.4. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agreeagree with your code.5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that thecode matches the secret code you have written down.The display will show SEC, indicating the radio isnow operable and secure.If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP willappear on the display. You will have to wait an hourwith the ignition on before you can try again. When youtry again, you will only have three chances to enter thecorrect code before INOP appears.If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.Disabling the Theft-Deterrent FeatureEnter your secret code as follows; pause no more than15 seconds between steps:1. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUNposition.2. Turn the radio off.3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them downuntil SEC shows on the display.4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agreewith your code.6. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agreewith your code.7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that thecode matches the secret code you have written down.The display will show ---, indicating that the radio isno longer secured.If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on thedisplay. The radio will remain secured until the correctcode is entered.When battery pow€ 's given to a secured radio, theradio won't turn on and LOC will appear on the display.,3928

Steering Wheel Controls (Option)If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certainradio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.SEEK: Press this button togo to the next higher orlower radio station.AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM, FMl or FM2.VOL: Press the up arrowto increase the volumeand the down arrow todecrease volume.SCAN: Press this button to scan the stations preset onyour radio pushbuttons. This feature works like yourradio’s P SCAN button and allows you to listen to eachof your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio willgo to the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, thengo on to the next preset station. Press SCAN again tostop scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.

~ BeforeFM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (1 6 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causingthe sound to come and go.To help avoid hearing loss or damage:0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortablyand clearly.NOTICE:The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.AIIudi SyHearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectableuntil it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to highervolumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loudand harmful to your hearing. Take precautions byadjusting the volume control on your radio to a safesound level before your hearing adapts to it.you add any sound equipment to yourvehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio -- be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s veryimportant to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, Delco radio or othersystems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’ssystems may interfere with the operation ofsound equipment that has been addedimproperly.So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check Federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight andextreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicatethat you have used your tape player for 50 hours withoutresetting the tape clean timer. If you notice a reductionin sound quality, try a known good cassette to see ifthe tape or the tape player is at fault. If this othercassette has no improvement in sound quality, cleanthe tape player.Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrubthe tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Itis normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insertthe cassette at least three times to ensure thoroughcleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette isavailable through your Buick dealer.You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-typecleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to cleanthe tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will noteject. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbingtype cleaner.Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality maydegrade over time. Always make sure that the cassettetape is in good condition before you have your tapeplayer serviced.Care of Your Compact DiscsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution andclean it, wiping from the center to the edge.Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handlingdiscs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

Power Antenna Mast CareYour power antenna will look its best and work well ifit’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast:1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits orequivalent solvent.3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removingany dirt.4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning theradio or ignition off and on.6. Repeat if necessary.I NOTICE:NOTICE:Before entering an automatic car wash, turn offyour radio to make the power antenna go down.This will prevent the mast from possibly gettingdamaged. If the antenna does not go down whenyou turn the radio off, it may be damaged orneed to be cleaned. In either case, lower theantenna by hand by carefully pressing theantenna down.If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you caneasily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kitand follow the instructions in the kit.Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubricationcould damage it.3-32

NOTES

NOTES3-34

Section 4 Your Driving and the RoadDefensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.Please start with a very important safety device in yourBuick: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they mightdo. Be ready for their mistakes.Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common, Allow enoughfollowing distance. It’s the best defensive drivingmaneuver, in both city and rural driving. You neverHere you’ll find information about driving on different know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brakekinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve or turn suddenly.also included many other useful tips on driving.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor tothe highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drivea vehicle:JudgmentMuscular CoordinationVision0 Attentiveness.Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have been associated with the useof alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half theadult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, sothey never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.The obvious way to solve this highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Butwhat if people do? How much is “too much” if thedriver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many mightthink. Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:0 The amount of alcohol consumed0 The drinker’s body weightThe amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking0 The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.According to the American Medical Association, a180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with aBAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach thesame BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.4-2

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person whoconsumes food just before or during drinking will have asomewhat lower BAC level.There is a gender difference, too. Women generally havea lower relative percentage of body water than men.Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that awoman generally will reach a higher BAC level than aman of her same body weight when each has the samenumber of drinks.The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BACof 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In someother countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for allcommercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to sixdrinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and howquickly the person drinks them.But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills ofmany people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance ofthis driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. ‘7’11 be careful” isn’t theright answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be ableto react quickly enough to avoid the collision.There’s something else about drinking and driving thatmany people don’t know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’ system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness andjudgment can be affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You can have a serious -- or evenfatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driverwho has been drinking. Ride home a in cab; or ifyou’re with a group, designate a driver who willnot drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle go whereyou want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering andthe acceIerator. All three systems have to do their workat the places where the tires meet the road.BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That’s reaction time.Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. Butthat’s only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehiclemoving at 6O~mph (I00 h/h) travels’ 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle and othersis important.And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement orgravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; and the condition of your brakes.Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’seasy to ask more of those control systems than the tiresand road can provide. That means you can lose controlof your vehicle.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is amistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool betweenhard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if youdo a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with thetraffic and allow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brakenormally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, thepedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist. Butyou will use it when you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.When you start’your engine, or when you begin to driveaway, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice that yourbrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.If there’s a problem with theanti-lock brake system, thiswarning light will stay on.See “Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light” inthe Index.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure fasterthan any driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and road conditions.Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out infront of you.You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If oneof the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer willseparately work the brakes at each front wheel and at therear wheels.You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you needto get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle infront of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakesif that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop, even though you haveanti-lock brakes.Using Anti-LockDon’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal downand let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the systemworking, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal.Traction Control System (Option)Your vehicle may have a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat one or both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem works the front brakes and reduces engine powerto limit wheel spin.You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” inthe Index.)TRACTIONOFFWhen the system is on, thiswarning light will come onto let you know if there’s aproblem with your tractioncontrol system.See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in theIndex. When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.The traction control system automatically comes onwhenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, you shouldalways leave the system on. But you can turn thetraction control system off if you ever need to. (Youshould turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuckin sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”in the Index.)

To turn the system off, pressthe button on the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.The traction control system warning light will come onand stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin whenyou press the button, the warning light will comeon -- but the system won’t turn off right away. Itwill wait until there’s no longer a current need to limitwheel spin.You can turn the system back on at any time by pressingthe button again. The traction control system warninglight should go off.Braking in EmergenciesUse your anti-lock braking system when you need to.With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.SteeringPower SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.Magnasteer (Option)Your vehicle may be equipped with GM Magnasteer TM ,a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort youfeel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here’s why:Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves. Thetraction of the tires against the road surface makes itpossible for the vehicle to change its path when you turnthe front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keepthe vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.4-9

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’rein a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then yousuddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering andacceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meetthe road. Unless you have traction control and the systemis on, adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on theaccelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want itto go, and slow down.Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds arebased on good weather and road conditions. Under lessfavorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.If you need to reduce your speed as you approach acurve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.L Ernencie!There are times when steenng can De more effective thanbraking. For example, you come over a hill and find atruck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a chld darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking -- if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time forevasive action -- steering around the problem.Your Buick can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking inEmergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better toremove as much speed as you can from a possiblecollision. Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find sometime that your right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou’re driving.OFF-ROAD RECOVERYAn emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you canturn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removingeither hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, andjust as quickly straighten the wheel once you haveavoided the object.The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive driving atall times and wear safety belts properly.7/ SLOW DOWN- y/ edge of paved surfaceIf the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer sothat your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. Youcan the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until theright front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.4-11

PaAngThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for justhe right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goesback into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger cansuddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.So here are some tips for passing:“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and tocrossroads for situations that might affect your passingpatterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever aboutmaking a successful pass, wait for a better time.Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate aturn or an intersection, delay your pass. A brokencenter line usually indicates it’s all right to pass(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solid line,even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.0 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closely reduces your area ofvision, especially if you’re following a largervehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if thevehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’tget too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move into theother lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a“running start” that more than makes up for thedistance you would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancel your pass,you need only slow down and drop back again andwait for another opportunity.If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, waityour turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying topass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.Remember to glance over your shoulder and checkthe blind spot.4-12

0 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are far enoughahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in yourinside mirror, activate your right lane change signaland move back into the right lane. (Remember thatyour right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle youjust passed may seem to be farther away from youthan it really is.)0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it maybe slowing down or starting to turn.0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps youcan ease a little to the right.Loss of ControlLet’s review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes, steeringand acceleration) don’t have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer andconstantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”those conditions. But skids are always possible.The three types of skids correspond to your Buick’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsaren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.If you have the traction control system, remember: Ithelps avoid only the acceleration skid.If you do not have traction control, or if the system isoff, then an acceleration skid is also best handled byeasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want thevehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, yourvehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’llwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theseconditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration orbraking (including engine braking by shifting to a lowergear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilyour vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow onthe road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow downwhen you have any doubt.Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. Onereason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- byalcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.0000000Drive defensively.Don’t drink and drive.Adjust your inside rearview mlrror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.Since you can’t see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles.Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.In remote areas, watch for animals.If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.Night VisionNo one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But aswe get older these differences increase. A 50-year-olddriver may require at least twice as much light to see thesame thing at night as a 20-year-old.What you do in the daytime can also affect your nightvision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes willhave less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re14-15driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cutdown on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driver whodoesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staringdirectly into the approaching headlamps.Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,.making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from nightblindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- andaren’t even aware of it.

LoadsRain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well becauseyour tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll geteven less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. Thesurface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes aretuned for driving on dry pavement.The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy raincan make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,pavement markings, the edge of the road and evenpeople walking.It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can ,cause problems, too.The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.qIA CAUTION:Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t workwell in a quick stop and may cause pulling to 0n.eside. You could lose control of the vehicle.After driving through a large puddle of water ora car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly untilyour brakes work normally.4-17

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on the water.This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’regoing fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,it has little or no contact with the road.Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if yourtires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one ormore is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing onthe road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephonepoles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” thewater’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when it is raining.Driving Through Deep Standing Water00NOTICE:If you drive too quickly through deep puddles orstanding water, water can come in through yourengine’s air intake and badly damage yourengine. Never drive through water that is slightlylower than the underbody of your vehicle. If youcan’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.Some Other Rainy Weather Tips0Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not justyour parking lamps -- to help make you more visibleto others.Besides slowing down, allow some extra followingdistance. And be especially careful when you passanother vehicle. Allow yourself more clear roomahead, and be prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See“Tires” in the Index.)

City DrivingHere are ways to increase your safety in city driving:Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip into anunknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross mostlarge cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See thenext part, “Freeway Driving.”)Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enough toneed it. When a light turns green, and just before youstart to move, check both ways for vehicles that havenot cleared the intersection or may be running thered light.One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

y DrivingMile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safestof all roads. But they have their own special rules.The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the samespeed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast ortoo-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat theleft lane on a freeway as a passing lane.4-1,At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to thefreeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as youdrive along the entrance ramp, you should begin tocheck traffic. Try to determine where you expect toblend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close tothe prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, checkyour mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often asnecessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stayin the right lane unless you want to pass.Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your“blind” spot.Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect to moveslightly slower at night.When you want to leave the freeway, move to the properlane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on tothe next exit.The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you are goingslower than you actually are.Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’swork -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first partof the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes youcan easily drive in.Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you’ll find experienced and able service experts inBuick dealerships all across North America. They’ll beready and willing to help if you need it.Here are some things you can check before a trip:0000000Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip a shorttime to avoid a major storm system?Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway H ypn~sIs there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires onthe road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.Then here are some tips:Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and tothe sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.0 If you get sleepy, pull off the road into rest, a serviceor parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, orboth. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway asan emergency.Hil lnd Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.4-22

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’replanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transaxle. These parts can work hard onmountain roads.0 Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some of theslowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.A CAUTION:If you don’t shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they wouldn’t work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even none goingdown a hill. You could crash. Shift down to letyour engine assist your brakes on a steepdownhill slope.0000Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have todo all the work of slowing down. They could get sohot that they wouldn’t work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have your engine runningand your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.Know how to go uphill. Shift down to THIRD (3).This will help cool your engine and transaxle, andyou can climb the hill better.Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speeds that letyou stay in your own lane.As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could besomething in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.You may see highway signs on mountains that warn ofspecial problems. Examples are long grades, passing orno-passing zones, a falling rocks area or windingroads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.4-23

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:@Have your Buick in good shape for winter,You may’warlt to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supplyof windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outerclothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and acouple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you willbe driving under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properly securethese items in your vehicle.4-24

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meet theroad probably have good traction.However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’llhave a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to bevery careful.What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offer theleast traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s aboutfreezing (32°F; 0” C) and freezing rain begins to fall.Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow -- drive with caution.If you have traction control, keep the system on. It willimprove your ability to accelerate when driving on aslippery road. Even though your vehicle has a tractioncontrol system, you’ll want to slow down and adjustyour driving to the road conditions. See “TractionControl System” in the Index.If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polishthe surface under the tires even more.i

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Eventhough you have the anti-lock braking system, you’llwant to begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See “Anti-Lock’’ in the Index.Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can’t reach: aroundclumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass mayremain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Ifyou see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it, Try not to brake while you’re actually onthe ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.If You’re Caught in a B----ArdIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay with yourvehicle unless you know for sure that you are near helpand you can hike through the snow. Here are somethings to do to summon help and keep yourself and yourpassengers safe:Turn on your hazard flashers.

Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou’ve been stopped by the snow.Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make bodyins‘ulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats -- anything you can wrap around yourself ortuck under your clothing to keep warm.Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle:This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and killyou. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking your exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time be to sure snowdoesn’t collect there.Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that’s away from the wind. This will helpkeep CO out.You can run the engine to keep wm, but be careful.4-27

~ __Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little fasterthan just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. Thisuses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps thebattery charged. You will need a well-charged battery torestart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later onwith your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine againand repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve thefuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can getout of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.Loading Your VehicleymTIRE-LOADING INFORMATIONOCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT.FRT. CTR. RR. TOTAL LBS. KGMAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLECAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRETIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURERTG PSI/KPaFRT.RR.SPA.IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PSIi28KPaSEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION-\~7Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight itmay properly carry. The Tire Loading Information labelfound on the rear edge of the driver's door tells you theproper size, speed rating and recommended inflationpressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives youimportant information about the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and the total weight that you cancarry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weightand includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.4-28

MFDBYGENERALMOTORSCORPDATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RRTHIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI-CABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLESAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTIONSTANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OFMANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, or it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to lose control.Also, overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle.The other label is the Certification Label, found on therear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the grossweight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread itout. Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in your trunk.I NOTICE:Your warranty does not cover parts orcomponents that fail because of overloading., If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.4-29

Towing a TrailerThings you put inside your vehicle can strike andinjure people in a sudden stop or turn, in ora crash.0 Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In atrunk, put them as far forward as you can.Try to spread the weight evenly.Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of them areabove the tops of the seats.0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint inyour vehicle.0 When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.Electronic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as theload changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need toadjust anything.If you don’t use the corn equipment and driveproperly, you can lose control when you pull atrailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, thebrakes may not work well -- or even at all. Youand your passengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed all thesteps in this section. Ask your Buick dealer foradvice and information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.NOTICE:Pulling a trailer improperly can damage yourvehicle and result in costly repairs not covered byyour warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, followthe advice in this part, and see your Buick dealerfor important information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the3800 (L67) Supercharged engine or the 3800 (L36)engine and proper trailer towing equipment. To identifywhat the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight of theTrailer” that appears later in this section. But traileringis different than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, durability, andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read this section carefullybefore you pull a trailer.Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engine isrequired to operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, thetrailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements.If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:00000There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you live butalso where you’ll be driving. A good source for thisinformation can be state or provincial police.Consider using a sway control if your trailer willweigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should alwaysuse a sway control if your trailer will weigh morethan 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealerabout sway controls.Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that voutow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmi) anddon’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) tosave wear on your vehicle’s parts.4-31

Three important considerations have to do with weight:the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongueand the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg),unless you have the optional 3,000 lbs. (1 350 kg) trailertowing package. But even that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull atrailer are all important. And, it can also depend on anyspecial equipment that you have on your vehicle.You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at:Buick Motor DivisionCustomer Assistance Center902 E. Hamilton AvenueFlint, MI 48550In Canada, write to:General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Assistance Center1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the total capacityweight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry init, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongueload from your vehicle’s capacity weight because yourvehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the Index for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.AB

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributinghitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percentof the total loaded trailer weight (B).After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them rightsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.Total :’.’Eight on .xu---* Vehicle’s ’Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to therecommended pressure for cold tires. You’ll find thesenumbers on the Certification label at the rear edge ofthe driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” inthe Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVWlimit for your vehicle, including the weight of thetrailer tongue.HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are afew reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here aresome rules to follow:@@If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, willweigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use aproperly mounted, weight-distributing hitch andsway control of the proper size. This equipment isvery important for proper vehicle loading and goodhandling when you’re driving.Will you have to make any holes in the body of yourvehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,then be sure to seal the holes later when you removethe hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into yourvehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirtand water can, too.The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended forhitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to them. Use only aframe-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the roadif it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safetychains and do not attach them to the bumper. Alwaysleave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.Trailer‘ BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must beadequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions forthe trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly.Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap intoyou vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brakesystems won’t work well, or at all.Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of thetrailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakesare still working.4-34

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as youwould when driving your vehicle without a trailer. Thiscan help you avoid situations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.Making TurnsNOTICE:Making very sharp turns while trailering couldcause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’tstrike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Tbrn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properlyhooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind youare seeing your signal when they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug atrailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lightingsystem, its bulb warning lights may not let you know ifone of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailerlighting system plugged in, be sure to check yourvehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be surethey’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailerlamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if oneof your vehicle lamps is out.4-36Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3) andreduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.Parking on HillsYou really should not park your vehicle, with a trailerattached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rigcould start to move. People can be injured, and bothyour vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parkingbrake, and the shift to PARK (P).5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:Start your engine;Shift into a gear; ande Release the parking brake.2. Let up on the brake pedal.3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment.Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Indexwill help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’sa good idea to review these sections before you startyour trip.Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

NOTES

Section 5 Problems on the RoadHere you’ll find what to do about some problems thatcan occur on the road.Hazard Warning ,FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn’ others. Theyalso let police know you have a. problem. Your front andrear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.Press the button in to makeyour front and rear turnsignal lamps flash onand off.Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.5-1

To turn off the flashers, pullout on the collar. When thehazard warning flashersare on, your turn signalswon't work.Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourBuick. But please follow the steps in this part to doit safely.Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:They contain acid that can burn you.They contain gas that can explode or ignite.They contain enough electricity toburn you.If you don't follow these steps exactly, some or allof these things can hurt you.1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

~NOTICE:NOTICE:If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your Buick, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set theparking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put anautomatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manualtransaxle in NEUTRAL (N).3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off theradios and all lamps that aren’t needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. It couldsave your radio!If you leave your radio on, it could be badlydamaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.IAn electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals oneach battery.

I . 5-4. .A CAUTION:Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light. .Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’tneed to add water to the Delco Freedom@ batteryinstalled in every new GM vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps,. be sure the rightamountoffluid is there. If it is low, add water to take careof that first. If you don’t, explosive gas couldbe present.Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get a shockand the vehicles could. be damaged.Before you connect the cables, here are some basic , . ’things you should know. Positive (+) will ‘go topositive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-),or a metal .engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) tonegative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage. ,the battery and maybe other parts, too.Fans or other moving engine parts ean injure youbadly. Keep your hands away fromoving partsonce the engines are running.I

7. Connect the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal ofthe vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.9. Now connect theblack negative (-) cableto the good battery’snegative (-) terminal.8. Don’t let the otherend touch metal.Connect it to thepositive (+)terminal of thegood battery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if thevehicle has one.Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t goto the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metalpart on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.I

13. Remove the cables in reverse order to preventelectrical shorting. Take care that they don’t toucheach other or any other metal.10.11.12.Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) awayfrom the dead battery, but not near engine parts thatmove. The electrical connection is just as goodthere, but the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for while. aTry to-start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it won’t start after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.A. Heavy Metal Engine PartB . Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

Towing Your VehicleTry to have a GM dealer or a professional towingservice tow your Buick.If your vehicle has been changed or modified since itwas factory-new by adding after-market items like foglamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, theseinstructions and illustrations may not be correct.Before you do anything, turn on the hazardwarning flashers.When you call, tell the towing service:00000That your vehicle can only be towed with certainequipment, as described later in this section.That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.The make, model and year of your vehicle.Whether you can still move the shift lever.If there was an accident, what was damaged.When the towing service arrives, let the tow operatorknow that this manual contains detailed towinginstructions and illustrations. The operator may want tosee them.A CAUTION:To help avoid injury to you or others:0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that isbeing towed.0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.0 Never tow with damaged parts not fullysecured.0 Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by the tow truck.Always secure the vehicle on each side withseparate safety chains when towing it.0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.5-7

LA vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’tadequately secured. This can cause a collision,serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Thevehicle should be tightly secured with chains orsteel cables before it is transported.Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharpedges underneath the towed vehicle. Always useT-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never useJ-hooks. They will damage drivetrain andsuspension components.When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignitionkey in the OFF position. The steering wheel shouldbe clamped in a straight-ahead position, with aclamping device designed for towing service. Do notuse the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. Thetransaxle should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parkingbrake released.Don’t have your vehicle towed on the front wheels,unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on thefront wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distancerestrictions later in this section or your transaxle will bedamaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then thefront wheels have to be supported on a dolly.

Front TowingAttach T-hook chainsbehind the front wheels intothe bottom slots of thecradle rails on both sides.Position a 4” x 4” wood beam across the sling chainscontacting the bottom of the radiator support. Positionthe lower sling crossbar just behind the rear edge of thefront bumper.

Rear TowingTow Limits -- $5 mpht(88 kmlh), 500 miles (800 km)Attach T-hook chains onboth sides in the slottedholes in the floor pansupport rails just ahead ofthe rear wheels.Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard endof each. lower control arrn.

Position the lower sling crossbar directly under therear bumper.Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard endof each lower control arm.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a warning light about a hot engine on yourBuick instrument panel and if you have the optionalgage cluster, a coolant temperature gage. You will alsofind a LOW COOLANT warning light.If Steam Is Coming From Your EngineSteam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off and get everyone awayfrom the vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolant beforeopening the hood.If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned. Stop your engine ifit overheats, and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.,NOTICE:If your engine catches fire because you keepdriving with no coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty.5-12

If No Steam Is Coming From Your EngineIf you get the overheat warning but see or hear nosteam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little too hot when you:0 Climb a long hill on a hot day.@Stop after high-speed driving.Idle for long periods in traffic.Tow a trailer.If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:1. Turn off your air conditioner.2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the window as necessary.3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a)or THIRD (3).If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,you can drive normally.If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see ifthe warning stops. But then, if you still have thewarning, turn off the engine and get evejyone out of thevehicle until it cools down.You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

When you decideit’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:An electric fan under the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not running and can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools aw~ay fromany underhood electric fan.If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down.A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Fans5-14.I .

\I A CAUTION:IHeater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Don't touch them. If youdo, you can be burned.Don't run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an' engine fire, -and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark. If it isn't, you may have a leak in theradiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water purnp orsomewhere elsC in the-cooling system..I NOTICE:Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant isn't covered by your warranty.If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check tosee if the electric engine fans are running. If the engineis overheating, both fans should be running. If theyaren't, your vehicle needs service.5-15 ,

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreezeat the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” inthe Index for more information.)I NOTICE:In cold weather, water can freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mix.Adding only plain water to your cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid like alcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the proper coolant mix. Withplain water or the wrong mix, your engine couldget too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheatwarning. Your engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of cleanwater and DEX-COOL TM antifreeze.5-16

A I CAUTION:You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at orabove the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.If the overheat warning continues, there’s one morething you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixdirectly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system iscool before you do it.5-17

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap -- even a little -- they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have toturn the pressure cap.5-18

Horn ).,AddCL=-~=- to the Radiator1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it firststops. (Don’t press down while turning thepressure cap.)If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now pushdown as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.5-19

I3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to tffe baseof the filler neck.4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULLCOLD mark.5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressure cap off.5-20

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine fans.7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mix through the filler neck untilthe level reaches the base of the filler neck.8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time duringthis procedure if coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure thearrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d use in askid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazardwarning flashers.Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over you or otherpeople. You and they could be badly injured.Find a level place to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).3. Turn off the engine.To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,you can put blocks at the front and rear of thetire farthest away from the one being changed.That would be the tire on the other side of thevehicle, at the opposite end.5-22

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.The following steps will tell you how touse the jack andchange tire. aLift the carpeting from the floor of the trunk.5-23

Turn the center retainer bolton the spare tire covercounterclockwise to removeit, then lift the tire cover.1Remove the spare tire from the trunk. See “CompactSpare Tire” later in this section for more informationabout the compact spare.Remove the jack hold-downscrew, then remove the jack.The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and thewheel wrench (B).

Wheel CoversThe following steps are necessary only if you have wirewheel covers:1. Remove the special keywrench that's attached tothe trunk sidewall.2. Using the handle.of the special keywrench, pry offthe center emblemcover to reveal thetheft-deterrentwheel nut.3. Push the end. ofthe special keywrench onto the, .theft-deteq-entwheel nut and'twistit counterclockwiseto remove the nut.5-25

4. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Remove the wheelcover by hand. Note: When replacing the wheelcover, carefully line up the tire valve stem and thenotch in the wheel cover.The following steps are necessary if you have the alloy(aluminum) wheel with a center cover that conceals thewheel nuts.2. If your vehicle hasthis aluminumwheel, you mayhave plastic wheelnut caps. Use thewheel nut wrenchto remove thewheel nut capsand to loosen thewheel nuts.3. When reinstalling the decorative nut caps, tighten thecaps snugly with the wheel wrench, then continueone-eighth rotation for steel caps and one-quarterrotation for plastic caps.4. When replacing the cover after the wheel is put backon the vehicle, do not use a hammer or mallet toinstall the cover.1. Insert the flat end of the wheel wrench in thenotch and pry off the center cover. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down, as it could be scratchedor damaged.5-26

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts, butdon’t remove them yet.2. The jack has a bolt at theend. Attach the wheelwrench to the jack bolt.3. Rotate the wheel wrench clockwise (to the right) toraise the jack head a few inches.

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get undera vehicle when it is supported only by a jack._INOTICE:4. Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame to putthe jack head into. The front notch is 10 inches(25 cm) back from the front wheel well. The rearnotch is 8 inches (20 cm) forward from the rearwheel well.5. .Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fitsfirmly on the ridge in the vehicle’s frame nearest theflat tire. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compactspare tire near you.Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned will damage the vehicle or may allowthe vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising your vehicle.5-28

~ Rust'8. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfaces andspare wheel.6. Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrenchclockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there is enough room for the sparetire to fit.7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When you change awheel, remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towelto do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If youdo, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel couldfall off, causing a serious accident.Replace the wheel nutswith the rounded end ofthe nuts toward thewheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheelis held against the hub.10. Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

A CAUTION:- 11. In a crisscross sequence;tighten the wheelnuts firmly.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to become looseand even come off. This could lead to an accident.Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you haveto replace them, be sure to new get GM originalequipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have thenuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100’lb-ft(140 N-m).NOTICE:Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead tobrake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact sparetire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk untilyou have the flat tire repaired or replaced.NOTICE:Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. Ifyou try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare, you could damage the cover or the spare.5-31

L7 the Flat Tire and ToolsStore the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment inthe trunk.Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use thefollowing procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.

Storing the Spare Tire and ToolsStoring a jack, a tire or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.Store the compact spare tire and tools as shown inthe diagram.The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later inthis section.

Compact Spare Tire,Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenyoq vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi(420 Pa).After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and make sure your .spare tire is corre,ctly inflated. The compact spare ismade to perform well at posted, speed limits for’distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired orreplaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Yourspare,will last longer and be’ in good shape @ case youneed it again.NOTICE:When the compact spare is installed, don’t takeyour vehicle through an automatic car wash withguide rails. The compact spare can get caught onthe rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,and maybe other parts of your vehicle.Don’t use your ‘compact spare on other vehicles.And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your sparetire and its wheel together.NOTICE: *Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Usingthem can damage your vehicle and can damagethe chainstoo. Don’t use tire chains on yourcompact spare.5-34 ~-

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or SnowWhat you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck isto spin your wheels too fast. The method known as“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, butyou must use caution.I NOTICE:Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of yourvehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheelstoo fast while shifting your transaxle back andforth, you can destroy your transaxle.If you let your tires SI at high speed, they canexplode, and you or others could be injured. And,the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. When you’restuck, spin the wheels as little possible. as Don’tspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shownon the speedometer.For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see “Tire Chains” in the Index.Rocking your vehicle to get it out:First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. If your vehiclehas traction control, you should turn the system off. (See“Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. Ifthat doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may needto be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

NOTES

Section 6 Service and Appearance CareHere you will find information about the care of yourBuick. This section begins with service and fuelinformation, and then it shows how to check importantfluid and lubricant levels. There is also technicalinformation about your vehicle, and a part devoted to itsappearance care.ServiceYour Buick dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to yourdealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GMparts and GM-trained and supported service people.We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:...Delco6-1

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, you’llwant to get the proper Buick Service Manual. It tells youmuch more about how to service your Buick than thismanual can. To order the proper service manual, see“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see “Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Buick” in the Index.You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, and the proper replacementparts and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If you usethe wrong fasteners, parts can later breakor fall off. You could be hurt.6-2

’ provideFuelThe 8th digit of your vehicle identification number(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You willfind the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.(See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)If you don’t have the 3800 Supercharged engine (VINCode l), use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher.If you have the 3800 Supercharged engine, use premiumunleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher.At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meetspecifications ASTM D4814 in the United States andCGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasolinespecifications have- been developed by the AmericanAutomobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) forbetter vehicle performance and engine protection.Gasolines meeting ihe AAMA specification couldimproved driveability and emission controlsystem protection compared to other gasolines.Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91(at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). If theoctane is, less than 87, you may get a heavy knockingnoise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damageyour engine.,If you have the 3800 Supercharged engine, in anemergency, you may be able to use .a lower octane -- aslow as 87 -- if heavy knocking does not occur. If youare using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasoline and youstill heq heavy knocking, your engine needs service. ,If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane orhigher and you still hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service. But don’t worry if you hear a littlepinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up ahill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higheroctane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constantknock that means you have a problem.If your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), itis designed to operate’on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If such fuels are not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehiclemay fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized Buick dealer for diagnosis to determine,thecause of failure. In the event it is determined that thecause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.6-3

In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancingadditive called MMT. If you use such fuels, youremission control system performance may deteriorateand the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrumentpanel may turn on. If this happens, return to yourauthorized Buick dealer for service.To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required tocontain additives that will help prevent deposits fromforming in your engine and fuel system, allowing youremission control system to function properly. Therefore,you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Inaddition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area to help clean the air. GeneralMotors recommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.I NOTICE:If you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard tofind. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you’ll be driving.You can also write us at the following address foradvice. Just tell us where you’re going and give yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).General Motors Overseas Distribution CorporationNorth American Export Sales (NAES)1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrodemetal parts in your fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’tbe covered under your warranty.6-4

Filling Your Tank/A CAUTION:IGasol-ine vapor is highly flammable. It burnsviolently, and that can cause very bad injuries..Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refuelingyour vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from gasoline.The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver:s side ofyour vehicle.6-5

--le release button for thefuel door is to the left of thesteering column.There is also a manual fueldoor release. Thismechanism is located in thetop of the trunkcompartment, on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.Pull the white tab to releasethe fuel door.

L I.If you get gasoline on yourself and thensomething ignites it, you could be badly burned.Gasoline can spray out on you if you open thefuel filler, cap too quickly. This spray can happer:if your tank isnearly full, and is more likely inhot weather. Open. the(fue1 filler slowly cap andwait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel door. ,To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise).Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from ,painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning theOutside of Your Buick” in the Index.When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right untilyou hear at least three clicks. Make sure you fully installthe cap.6-7

NOTICE:If you need a new cap, be sure to get the righttype. Your dealer can get one for you. If you getthe wrong type, it may not fit or have properventing, and your fuel tank and emissions systemmight be damaged.Checking Things Under the HoodIThings that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.Hood ReleaseIAn electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

Lift up on this lever asgoulift up #the hood.Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate thesecondary hood release. It is under the front edgethe grille.ofBefore closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are onproperly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.!6-9

wv DCIIC~ II [~uut: n) u~gmc (L36)When you open the hood on the 3800 (L36) engine, here’s what you will see:.. ,.A. Engine Coolant Surge TankB. BatteryC. Radiator Pressure CapD. Engine Oil DipstickE. Oil Fill CapE Automatic Transaxle FluidDipstickG. Brake Master CylinderH. Air CleanerI. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir

3800 Supercharged (L67) Engine (Option)When you open the hood on the 3800 Supercharged engine, here's what you will see:... . .A. Supercharged Engine CoolantSurge TankB. BatteryC. Radiator Pressure CapD. Supercharged Engine OilDipstickE. Supercharged Oil Fill CapF. Automatic Transaxle FluidDipstick-.G. Brake Master CylinderH. Air CleanerI. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir6-11

Your Park Avenue Ultra has a 3800 Superchargedengine. Buick chose supercharging rather thanturbocharging because Buick emphasizes smooth,refined power.The supercharger is a device which is designed to pumpmore air into the engine than it would normally use.This air mixed with fuel creates increased engine power.Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven from anengine accessory drive belt, increased pressure isavailable at all driving conditions.The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) works with avacuum control to regulate the increased pressurerequired during specific driving conditions. When thisincreased pressure or boost is not desired, such as duringidling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that thesupercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass. Allof these controls working together provide highperformance character and fuel efficiency in the3800 V6 Supercharged Buick engine.The power steering pump and reservoir are mountedon the rear (driver’s side) of the engine block. See“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for when youshould check the fluid.Engine OilCHECK OILLEVELIf the CHECK OILLEVEL light on theinstrument panelcomes on, it meansyou need to checkyour engine oil levelright away.For more information, see “Check Oil Level Light” inthe Index. You should check your engine oil levelregularly; this is an added reminder.

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.Turn off the engine and givethe oil a few minutes todrain back into the oil pan.If you don’t, the oil dipstickmight not show theactual level.Checking Engine OilPull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.When to Add OilIf the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll needto add some oil. But you must use the right kind. Thispart explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcasecapacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.

INOTICE:Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has somuch oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the properoperating range, your engine could be damaged.Add engine oil at the engine oil fill cap next to theoil dipstick.Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in theproper operating range. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when you’re through.What Kind of Oil to UseOils recommended for your vehicle can be identified bylooking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbolindicates that the oil has been certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil whichdoes not carry this Starburst symbol.If you change yourown oil, be sure youuse oil that has theStarburst symbol onthe front of the oilcontainer. If you haveyour oil changed foryou, be sure the oil putinto your engine isAmerican PetroleumInstitute certified forgasoline engines.You should also use the proper viscosity oil for yourvehicle, as shown in the following chart:

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADEENGINE OILSFOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWESTSAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.HOTWEATHER\O F i-tlOOr+80-+ 60-+40-+ 20 -0-WI\’ +38 OCj+27 i+4-7COLDWEATHER- 18 I-SAE 5W-30SYMBOL6EI 1OW-30PREFERREDabove 0°F(-1nOcl ,---,DO NOT USE SA€ 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDEDAs shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is best for yourvehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s goingto be colder than 60°F (1 6°C) before your next oilchange. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,such as SAE 20W-50.I NOTICE:Use only engine oil with the American PetroleumInstitute Certified For Gasoline Engines“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use therecommended oil can result in engine damage notcovered by your warranty.GM Goodwrench@ oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.7n.gine Oil __.Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Buick dealer isready to advise if you think something should be added.0-15

When to Change Engine OilSee if any one of these is true for you:0Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).This is particularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequentdriving in stop-and-go traffic).Most trips are through dusty areas.You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top ofyour vehicle.The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxior other commercial application.Driving under these conditions causes engine oil tobreak down sooner. If any one of these is true for yourvehicle, then you need to change your oil and filterevery 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whicheveroccurs first. (See “Change Oil Soon” in the Index.)If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whicheveroccurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmedengine under highway conditions causes engine oil tobreak down slower.If the optional CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on,you will need to change your oil sooner than eithermileage specified. Depending upon driving habits, theCHANGE OJL SOON light may come on as early as2,000 miles or less from the last time the oil life monitorwas reset. (See “Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.) Alwaysreset the oil life monitor after every oil change.What to Do with Used OilDid you know that used engine oil contains certainelements that may be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skinfor very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throwaway clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (Seethe manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposalof oil products.)Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oilfrom the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Ifyou have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,ask your dealer, a service station or a local recyclingcenter for help.

4Air CleanerThe air cleaner is in the front right section of theengine compartment.1. Remove the screws on the air cleaner housing cover.Before servicing the air cleaner, the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) cover must be removed. Remove thetwo wing nuts to remove the PCM cover.

2. Remove the air intake hose that snaps over thethrottle body by pulling the hose upward and awayfrom the throttle body. After detaching the hosefrom the throttle body, then pull back the entirerear portion of the air cleaner by pulling upwardand rearward.3. Replace the air filter.4. Reinstall the rear section of the air cleaner.5. Reattach the air intake hose.Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when toreplace the air filter.See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.6-18

1Supercharger OilOperati--; the engine with the air cleaner off cancause you or others to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops flame if the enginebackfires. If it isn’t there, and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive withit off, and be careful working on the engine withthe air cleaner off.Unless you aretechnically qualifiedand have the propertools, you should letyour dealer or aqualified servicecenter perform thismaintenance.NOTICE:If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily getinto your engine, which will damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.When to CheckCheck oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every36 months, whichever occurs first.What Kind of Oil to UseSee “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Indexand use only the recommended oil.- 6-19

How to Check and Add OilCheck oil only when the engine is cold. Allow theengine to cool two to three hours after running.rIIf you remove the supercharger oil fill plug whilethe engine is hot, pressure may cause hot oil toblow out of the oil fill hole. You may be burned.Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.1. Remove the wiring harness shield.2. Clean the area around the oil fill plug beforeremoving it.3. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 Allen wrench.4. The oil level is correct when it just reaches thebottom of the threads of the inspection hole.5. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place. Torqueto 88 lb-in (10 N-m).6. Replace wiring harness shield.Automatic Transaxle FluidWhen to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90 OF (32 O C) or higher.0 In hilly or mountainous terrain.0 When doing frequent trailer towing.Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at your hick dealershipService' Department.If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180 "F to 200 "F(82°C to 93°C).Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(1.0"C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may haveto drive longer.1 NOTICE:Too much or too little fluid can damage yourtransaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine partsor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure toget an acc ate reading if you check yourUTtransaxle fluid.Checking the Fluid Level000Park your vehicle on a level place.. Keep theengine running.With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift 'lever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftWait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxlefluid level if you have been driving:When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).0 At high speed for quite a while.0 In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.While pulling a trailer.0lever in PARK (P). 'Let the engine run at idle for three to five rhinutes.6-21

IThen, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:II1. The transaxle fluiddipstick top is around loop and isnext to the brakemaster cylinderbehind the engineblock. Pull out thedipstick and wipe itwith a clean rag orpaper towel.2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area.4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.86-22

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transaxle fluid to use. See “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” in the Index.If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area onthe dipstick.1. Pull out the dipstick.2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a pint(0.5 L). Don’t ovel-fill. We recommend you use onlyfluid labeled DEXRON@-111, because fluid with thatlabel is made especially for your automatic transaxle.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty.After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check.”0 When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled with newDEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) enginecoolant. This coolant is designed to remain in yourvehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles (166 000 km),whichever occurs first.The following explains your cooling system and howto add coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.A 50/50 mixture of water and the proper coolant foryour Buick will:Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).9 Give boiling protection up to 265 OF ( 129 O C).Protect against rust and corrosion.Help keep the proper engine temperature.0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

NOTICE:When adding coolant it is important that you useDEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free)coolant meeting GM Specification 6277M.If silicated coolant is added to the system,premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion may result. In addition, the enginecoolant will require change sooner -- at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first.What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean water (preferablydistilled) and one-half DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored,silicate-free) antifreeze that meets GM Specification6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. UseGM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer) (GM PartNo. 3634621) with any complete coolant change. If youuse this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

~~‘ A CAUTICY:NOTICE:-Adding only plain water to your cooling system,can be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid like alcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mix will. Your vehi.cle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the proper coolant mix. Withplain water or the wrong mix, your engine couldget too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheatwarning. Your engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50150 mix-of cleanwater and DEX-COOL (orange-colored,silicate-free) antifreeze.If you use .an improper coolant mix, your enginecould overheat and be badly damaged. Therepair cost wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mix can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.NOTICE:If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have toadd extra inhibitors or additives which claim toimprove the system. These can be harmful.6-25

Checking Coolant- If this light comes on, itmeans you're low onengine coolant.COOLANTLOWAdding Coolant-If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at thecoolant recovery tank.The coolant recovery tank is located at the left of theengine compartment.When your engine is cold, the coolant 'level should beat F'ULL COLD or a little higher. When your engineis warm, the level should be up to F'ULL HOT or alittle higher.

Radiator Pressure Capnrning the radiator pressure cap when the engineand radiator are hot can allow steam and scaldingliquids to blow out and burn you badly. With thecoolant recovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turn theradiator pressure cap -- even a little -- when theengine and radiator are hot.Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful notto spill it.You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.NOTICE:Your radiator pressure cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed toprevent coolant loss and possible engine damagefrom overheating. Be sure the arrows on the capline up with the overflow tube on the radiatorfiller neck.When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an AC@cap is recommended.ThermostatEngine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostatin the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops theflow of coolant through the radiator until the coolantreaches a preset temperature.When you replace your thermostat, an AC@ thermostatis recommended.

Power Steering FluidWhen to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.The power steering fluid reservoir on the L36 and L67engine is located below the alternator and behind theaccessory drive belt on the driver’s side toward the rearof the engine.How To Check Power Steering FluidWhen the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the capand wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the capand completely tighten it. Then remove the cap againand look at the fluid level on the dipstick.The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level upto the mark.What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will beoperating your vehicle in an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.Adding Washer FluidOpen the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Addwasher fluid until the tank is full.NOTICE:0000When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.Don’t mix,water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution to freezeand damage your washer fluid tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it’s very cold. Thisallows for expansion, which could damagethe tank if it is completely full.Don’t use radiator antifreeze in yourwindshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.I6-29

BrakesBrake Fluidsystem fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later yourbrakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you’ll have too muchfluid when you get new brake linings. You should add(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hotenough. You or others could be burned, and yourvehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake hydraulic system.There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in thereservoir might go down. ,The first is that the brake fluidgoes down to an acceptable level during normal brakelining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid levelgoes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking outof the brake system. If it is, you should have your brakeWhen your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. A chime will sound if youtry to drive with this warning light on. See “BrakeSystem Warning Light” in the Index.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 @ (GM PartNo. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only, and always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap before removing it.A CAU”’3N:With the wrong kind of‘fluid.in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, or theymay not even work at all. This could cause acrash. Always use the proper brake fluid.I NOTICE:I00Using the wrong fluid can badly damagebrake system parts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in your brake system can damage brakesystem parts so badly that they’ll have to bereplaced. Don’t let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately. See “Appearance Care” inthe Index.I 6-31

Brake WearYour Buick has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make ahigh-pitched warning sound when the brake pads areworn and new pads are needed. The sound may come andgo or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (exceptwhen you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).The brake wear warning sound means that sooneror later your brakes won’t work well. That couldlead to an accident. When you hear the brakewear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.I NOTICE:Continuing to drive with worn-out brake padscould result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.Free movement of brake calipers and properly torquedwheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipersfor movement, brake pads for wear, and evenly torquewheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but ifyou ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rearbrake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing. When you have thefront brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really good braking.Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brakeparts in them, as your Buick does when it is new. Whenyou replace parts of your braking system -- for example,when your brake linings wear down and you have tohave new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuineGM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange -- for the worse. The braking performanceyou’ve come to expect can change in many other waysif someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.BatteryEvery new Buick has a Delco Freedom@ battery. Younever have to add water to one of these. When it’s timefor a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedombattery. Get one that has the replacement number shownon the original battery’s label.Vehicle StorageIf you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, take off the black, negative (-) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youaren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Indexfor tips on working around a battery withoutgetting hurt.Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehiclefor longer storage periods.Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-DeterrentFeature” in the Index.

Bulb ReplacementThe following procedure tells you how to replace yourheadlamp bulbs.Halogen BulbsHeadlampsHalogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions on the bulb package.Each headlamp is attached by retainers with roundplastic knobs.

1. Remove the retainers by turning in acounterclockwise direction.2. Lift the headlamp away from the car.6-35

3. Turn the bulb socketone-quarter turncounterclockwise, whilepressing it firmly.4. Remove the wireconnector from the bulbby lifting the lock taband pulling it away fromthe plastic base.To reassemble, attach the wire connector (A) to theplastic base making sure the lock tab (B) is over thelock (C). Install the bulb by putting the small tab (D)into the small notch in the lamp (E). Turn the bulbsocket one-quarter turn clockwise to lock into place.When reinstalling the headlamp assembly into theheadlamp mounting panel, make sure the tab isproperly engaged in the panel slot.TaillampsOpen the trunk. On eitherside of the rear of the trunkare two plastic nuts.Remove only the side thatyou need to access. Pull thecarpet back away from therear area. The taillamp,sidemarker and back-uplamps can now be accessed.

Two taillamp bulbs are a tabbed assembly. Squeeze therelease in and pull the assembly out. Pull the bulbstraight out from the socket. To replace the assembly,insert the tabs into the slots and push in until it locksinto place.To replace the third taillamp bulb and sidemarker bulb,turn the socket one-quarter turn and pull it out. Pull thebulb straight out from the socket.The back-up bulb can be replaced by squeezing the lockon the socket, turning it one-quarter turn and pulling itout. Pull the bulb straight out. Reverse the above steps toreassemble the lamp and the trunk trim.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementReplacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. Here’s how to remove thetype with a release clip:1. Pull the windshield wiper arnn away from the windshield.2. Push down on the release clip with a screwdriver andpull the blade assembly off the wiper arm.3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm.For the correct windshield wiper blade replacementlength and type, see “Capacities and Specifications’’ inthe Index.

TiresWe don’t make tires. Your new Buick comes with ’high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have qu,estions about your tire warranty andwhere to obtain service, see your Buick Warrantybooklet for details.A C IUTION:-Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.0 Overloading your tires can cause overheatingas a result of too much friction. You couldhave an about and a serious accident. See“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger asoverloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact -- such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If yourtread is badly worn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.6-39

Inflation -- Tire PressureThe Tire-Loading Information label, which is located onthe rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.“Cold” means your vehicle has been sittkg for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km)..NOTICE:Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation oroverinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you canget the following:0 Too much flexing0 Too much heatI0 Tire overloading0 Bad wearBad handlingBad fuel economy.(Continued)NOTICE: (Continued)If your tires have too much air (overinflation),you can get the following:Unusual wearBad handling0 Rough ride0 Needless damage from road hazards.When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should beat 60 psi (420 Ea).How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.Be sure to puthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dik and moisture.6-40,

Tire Inspection and Rotation ,Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles(10 000 to 13 000 km) for any signs of unusual wear.If unusual wear is present, rotate yourtires as soon aspossible and check wheel alignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s The for NewTires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section formore information.The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The firstrotation is the most important. See “ScheduledMaintenance Services” in the Index for scheduledrotation intervals.IIWhen rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown on the Tire-LoadingInformation label. Make certain that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.IA CAUTION:Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to whichit is fastened, can make wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and causean accident. When you change a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but besure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)6-41

7 One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tires haveonly 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) orless of tread remaining.You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:0 You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.0 You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split.0 The tire has a puncture, cut or other darnage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size or locationof the damage.uying New TilTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Tire-Loading Information label.The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That wayyour vehicle will continue to have tires that are designedto give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,traction, ride and other things during normal service onyour vehicle. If your tires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”(for mud and snow).If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

Mixing tires could cal ! you to lose control whiledriving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have a crash.Using tires of different sizes may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the samesize and type tires on all wheels.It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.Uniform Tire Quality GradingThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) Thegrades are molded on the sidewalls of most passengercar tires.The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saveror temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to Federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Traction -- A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, andC, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is basedon braking (straightahead) traction tests and does notinclude cornering (turning) traction.Temperature -- A, By CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than the minimum requiredby law.Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need to have your wheelsaligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wearor your vehicle pulling one way or the other, thealignment may need to be reset. If you notice yourvehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See yourBuick dealer if any of these conditions exist.Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to havethe right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for yourBuick model.Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always usethe correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor replacement.NOTICE:The WtMg wheel can also cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tirechain‘clearance to the body and chassis.See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index formore information.6-45

Used Replacement WheelsA CAUTION:Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used orhow many miles it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause an accident. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.rire PainsNOTICE:If your Buick has P215/70R15 size tires, don’t usetire chains. They can damage your vehicle.If you have other tires, use tire chains only wherelegal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class“S” type chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels withchains on will damage your vehicle.

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.When you use anything from a container to clean yourBuick, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warningsand instructions. And always open your doors orwindows when you’re cleaning the inside.Never use these to clean your vehicle:GasolineBenzene0 NaphthaCarbon TetrachlorideAcetonePaint ThinnerTurpentineLacquer ThinnerNail Polish RemoverThey can all be hazardous -- some more thanothers -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:0 Alcohol0 Laundry Soap0 BleachReducing AgentsCleaning the Inside of Your BuickUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loosedirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.Your Buick dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-typespot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They willclean normal spots and stains very well. Do not usethem on vinyl or leather.Here are some cleaning tips:0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean areaoften. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated areaonly. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entirearea immediately or it will set.

Using Foar ’me Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove anyloose dirt.2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Masksurrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner followingthe directions on the container label.4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.5. Don’t saturate the material.6. Don’t rub it roughly.7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a spongeto remove the suds.8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.9. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp papertowel or cloth.10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer.11. Wipe with a clean cloth.Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on FabricFirst, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.Some spots and stains will clean off better with justwater and mild soap.If you need to use a solvent:0 Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material witha clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,light pressure and clean cloths (preferablycheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside ofthe stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keepchanging to a clean section of the cloth.When you clean a stain from fabric, immediatelydry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent acleaning ring.Special Cleaning ProblemsGreasy or Oily StainsStains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoepolish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmeticcreams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt canbe removed as follows:1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain ifleft on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removedas soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleanerwill dissolve them and may cause them to spread.6-48

Non-Greasy StainsStains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruitjuice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood canbe removed as follows:1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructionsdescribed earlier.3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,treat the area with a waterbaking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.Combination StainsStains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:0 Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean withcool water and allow to dry.If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do it more than once.Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth anda GM Vinylbeather Cleaner or equivalent product.Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap.For stubborn stains, use a GM Vinylbeather Cleaneror equivalent product.0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.0 Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt isallowed to work into the finsh, it can hann the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument PanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones orwaxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through the windshieldunder certain conditions.Cleaning Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker won’t be damaged. Some spots and stains willclean off better with just water and mild soap. Ifsomething gets on one of them and you need to use asolvent, follow these steps:0 Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material witha clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,light pressure and clean cloths (preferablycheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside ofthe stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keepchanging to a clean section of the cloth.When you clean a stain from fabric, immediatelydry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent acleaning ring.Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mild soap andlukewarm water.16-50

GlassGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GMPart No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleanerwill remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films.Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they maycause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rearwindow, since they may have to be scraped off later. Ifabrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rearwindow, an electric defogger element may be damaged.Any temporary license should not be attached across thedefogger grid.Cleaning the Outside of theWindshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, waxor other material may be on the blade or windshield.Clean the outside of the windshield with GMWindshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@ (GM PartNo. 105001 1). The windshield is clean if beads do notform when you rinse it with water.Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a clothsoaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis andreplaced when worn.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth at least every sixmonths. During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. (See “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)Cleaning the Outside of Your BuickThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Useliquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, orthat contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry onthe surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with asoft, clean chamois or a 100% cotton towel to avoidsurface scratches and water spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your Buick byhand may be necessary to remove residue from the paintfinish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”in the Index.)Your Buick has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.I NOTICE:Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., candamage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted

surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over a periodof years. You can help to keep the paint finish lookingnew by keeping your Buick garaged or coveredwhenever possible.Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped)Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners orabrasive cleaning brushes on them because you coulddamage the surface.Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.NOTICE:When applying a tire dressing always take care towipe off any overspray or splash from all paintedsurfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.Petroleum-based products may damage thepaint finish.Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finishshould be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrodequickly and may develop into a major repair expense.Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer or other serviceoutlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust controlcan collect on the underbody. If these are not removed,accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbodyparts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem even though they have corrosion protection.At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areasof the frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shapeddiscolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched intothe paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Buickwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

cENNUMBERI SIZE 1 DESCRIPTION USAGE1See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.* Not recommended for pigskin suede leather.** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)PSAMPLE4UXTM072675This is the legal identifier for your Buick. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on thedriver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is thengine code.This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on the spare tire cover. It’s veryhelpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:0 your VIN,the model designation,0 paint information, and0 a list of all production options and specialequipment.Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical SystemAdd-on Electrical EquipmentI NOTICE:Don’t add anything electrical to your Buick unlessyou check with your dealer first. Some electricalequipment can damage your vehicle and thedamage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.Some add-on electrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your Buick, see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Buick” in the Index.IHeadlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker inthe underhood fuse center. An electrical overload willcause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases toremain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiringchecked right away.Windshield WipersThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Ifthe overload is caused by some electrical problem andnot snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.Power Windows and Other Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When the currentload is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.&6-57

MaxifuseslRelay CenterTo check the fuses in this underhood fuse center, turnthe two knobs one-quarter turn counterclockwise andremove the cover. There is a chart inside the cover thatexplains the features and controls governed by each fuseand relay.The PASS-Key 11 fuse is located in the right siderelay center.Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damagecaused by electrical problems.Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical sizeand rating.If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle thatyou can get along without -- like the radio or cigarettelighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the driver’sside and passenger’s side fuse blocks.

- - er ’s Slae r ‘use PanelThe left side fuse panel is located under the instrumentpanel, next to the parking brake.When finished, replace the cover by pressing it back upinto place.Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses. You’ll find a fusepuller clipped to the inside of the cover. Place the wideend of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse.Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out.Spare fuses are located in the slots labeled “Spare” onthe following chart.

1 41 I*5 6 7 8 9Position123451A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A1B2B3BCircuitryCircuit Breaker-Power Windows,AstroroofNot UsedCircuit Breaker-Power SeatsNot UsedNot UsedStart-up Si nal- Air Bag,PASS-Key 8 I1SpareNot UsedInterior LampsBase Cluster, Automatic A/C,Lamp Monitors - Low Coolant,Oil LevelCourtesy Lamps, Power Mirrors,Memory Seat SwitchNot UsedPerimeter LightingFront Ashtray Cigarette LighterTurn Signal, Back-up Lamps,Cornering Lamps,Brake-Transaxle Shift InterlockSpareNot Used6-60

Position4B5B6B7B8B9B1c2c3c4c5c6C7c8C9c1D2D3D4D5D6DCircuitryNot UsedAnti-Lock Brake SystemBrake and Hazard LampsNot UsedInterior LightingElectronic Level ControlAir BagSpareNot UsedNot UsedCooling Fans, TransaxleParking LampsNot UsedNot UsedChime, Radio, ClusterIgnition (Run/Crank), Chime,ClusterSpareHeated MirrorNot UsedBase A/CNot UsedPosition7D8D9D1E2E3E4E5E6E7E8E9ECircuitryNot UsedRadioRear Cigarette LightersNot UsedAir BagPASS-Key I1Ignition (Off/Unlock)Not UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedWipers, WasherRear DefogPassenger’s Side Fuse PanelAdditional fuses are located in the relay center, on thefar right side, below the instrument panel. You mustremove the sound insulator on the right side of thepassenger footwell to replace these fuses.Replacing these fuses is difficult. We recommend thatyou see your dealer if you need one replaced.

POSl?lONSr---------?I FUSE II POSITIONS IPosition129101112CircuitryDoor Locks, Trunk Pull-Down,Fuel Door ReleasePower Antenna, Lock Switch,Trunk ReleaseHornsNot UsedCruise Control, Misc. EngineControlsFuel F’umpInjectorsPowertrain Control Module,PASS-Key@IINot UsedNot UsedA/C ProgrammerNot Used6-62

Replacement BulbsEXTERIORHeadlampBULBHigh-Beam ........................... 9005Low-Beam ........................... 9006Parkmum ............................ 2057NAParking ............................... 194NASidemarker. Front ..................... 194NABack-up .............................. 3156Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ........... 1156License ................................. 194Sidemarker. Rear .......................... 24Tail .................................... 194Tail/Stop/Turn .......................... 3057Cornering .............................. 1156INTERIORBULBAshtray ................................. 161Domemeading. Front ...................... 563Reading. Rear ......................... A3 173BDoor Warning .......................... PC 168Engine Compartment ...................... 561Footwell Courtesy ........................ 168GloveBox .............................. 194Luggage Compartment ................... 2 11 -2Vanity Mirror. Front ...................... 7065Vanity Mirror. Rear ....................... 564Frontmear Door Courtesy ................ PC168Rear Overhead ........................... 563

Capacities and SpecificationsBelt TensionsAutomatically controlled by a Self-Tension idler pulley. Tension adjustment should never be necessary.Automatic Transaxle AT (Overdrive)When draining or replacing torque converter, more fluid may be needed.Pan Removal and Replacement ............................................ 6 quarts (5.6 L)After Complete Overhaul .............................................. 11 quarts (1 0.4 L)Cooling System ..................................................... 13 quarts (12.3 L)Engine CrankcaseOil change with filter change ........................................... 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)FuelTank ........................................................... 18gallons(68L)Power SteeringPump Only ............................................................. 1 pint (0.5 L)Complete System .................................................... 1 1/2 pints (0.7 L)Tire Pressures, Sizes ........................... The Tire-Loading Information label, which islocated on the rear edge of the driver’s door,shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires.Wheel Nut Torque ................................................. 100 lb-ft (140 N-rn)Windshield Wiper Blades (6.32 Pin Type) ............................. 22 inches (565 mm)Refrigerant (R=134a), Air Conditioning ............ See refrigerant charge label under the hood.NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommendedin this manual.6-64

Air Conditioning RefrigerantsNot all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needsrefrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.If you're not sure, ask your Buick dealer.Engine Specifications3800 EngineVIN Engine Code ................................... KType ............................................ V6Displacement .................................... 3.8LCompression Ratio ............................... 9:4: 1Horsepower ..................................... 205Firing Order .............................. 1-6-5-4-3-2Thermostat Temperature ................... 195 OF (91 O C)3800 Supercharged Engine1V63.8L8:5: 12401-6-5-4-3-2195°F (91OC)

Vehicle DimensionsOverallLength ............... 205.2 inches (5 2 12.1 mm)Width ................. 73.6 inches (1 869.4 mm)Height ................. 55.1 inches (1 399.5 mm)Wheelbase ............ 110.8 inches (2 814.3 mm)Front Tread ............. 60.5 inches (1 534.3 mm)Rear Tread ............. 60.2 inches (1 529.1 mm)Normal MaintenanceReplacement PartsAir Cleaner Element .......... AC Type A- 1096CEngine Oil Filter ................ AC Type PF-47Fuel Filter .................... AC Type GF-627Spark Plugs .................. ACType 41-921Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)6-66

Engine Accessory Belt (L36)A. Power SteeringB. AlternatorC. Air ConditioningD. CrankE. Coolant PumpE TensionerCIThe 3800 (L36) engine uses an engine accessory belt.This diagram shows the features connected by the beltrouting. See “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index forwhen to check the belt.

mharged Engine Accessory Belt (L67)A.B.C.D.E.EAlternatorPower SteeringCrankSuperchargerCoolant PumpAir Conditioning1. Front Belt2. Back BeltFThe Supercharged 3800 engine uses two accessory drivebelts. One belt drives the generator, power steeringpump, coolant pump and air conditioning compressor.The second belt drives the supercharger. Each belt hasits own tensioner and idler pulley. See “MaintenanceSchedule” in the Index for when to check the accessorydrive belts and supercharger oil level. Have your dealercheck the oil level in the supercharger.6-68

NOTES

NOTES

~ IMPORTANT:~ ATSection 7 Maintenance ScheduleIKEEP ENGINE OILTHE PROPER ILEVEL AND CHANGE ASIRECOMMENDEDThis section covers the maintenance required for yourBuick. Your vehicle needs these services to retain itssafety, dependability and emission control performance.ProtectionPlanHave you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your Buickdealer for details.IntroductionYour Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance proceduresare important. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the levelof emissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in goodcondition, please maintain your vehicle properly.7-1

How This Section is OrganizedThe remainder of this section is divided into five parts:“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” showswhat to have done and how often. Some of theseservices can be complex, so unless you are technicallyqualified and have the necessary equipment, you shouldlet your dealer’s service department or another qualifiedservice center do these jobs.Performing maintenance work on vehicle a canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your own maintenancework only if you have the required know-howand the proper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.If you are skilled enough to do some work on yourvehicle, you will probably wanto get the serviceinformation GM publishes. See “Service and OwnerPublications” in the Index.“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you whatshould be checked whenever you stop for fuel. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your Buick dealer’sservice department or another qualified service centershould perform.“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some products GM recommends to help keep yourvehicle properly maintained. These products, or theirequivalents, should be used whether you do the workyourself or have it done.“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place foryou to record the maintenance performed on yourvehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, besure to write it down in this part. This will help youdetermine when your next maintenance should be done.In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenancereceipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle forwarranty repairs.

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesUsing Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we don’t knowexactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very shortdistances only a few times a week. Or you may drivelong distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.Because of all the different ways people use their GMvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even needmore frequent checks and replacements than you’ll findin the schedules in this section. So please read thissection and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in goodcondition, see your Buick dealer.This part tells you the maintenance services you shouldhave done and when you should schedule them. If yougo to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll knowthat GM-trained and supported service people willperform the work using genuine GM parts.The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed inPart D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle usesthese. All parts should be replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyone else drivesthe vehicle.These schedules are for vehicles that:carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’sTire-Loading Information label. See “Loading YourVehicle’’ in the Index.are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits .use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.Selecting the Right ScheduleFirst you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules isright for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide whichschedule to follow:7-3

Maintenance ScheduleI Short Trip/City DefinitionFollow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if anyone of these conditions is true for your vehicle:Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).This is particularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequentdriving in stop-and-go traffic).0 Most. trips are through dusty areas.You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on topof your vehicle.If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxior other commercial application.One of the reasons you should follow this schedule ifyou operate your vehicle under any of these conditionsis that these conditions cause engine oil to breakdown soonel:7-4Short Trip/City IntervalsEvery 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and FilterChange (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication(or 6 months, whichever occurs first).At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) -- Then Every12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation.Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner FilterInspection, if driving in dusty conditions.Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner FilterReplacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.Supercharger Oil Check (or every 36 months,whichever occurs first) (3.8L Code 1 engine only).Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic TransaxleService (severe conditions only).Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine AccessoryDrive Belt Inspection.Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling SystemService (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.These intervals only summarize maintenance services.Be sure to.follow the complete m.aintenance schedule onthe

Maintenance ScheduleFollow this maintenance schedule only if none of th,conditions from the Short Trip/City MaintenanceSchedule is true.Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine underhighway conditions causes engine oil to breakdown slower.Long Trip/Highway Intervalsdvery 7,500 Miles (12500 h): Engine Oil and FilterChange (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) -- Then Every15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Tire Rotation.Every 30,000 Miles (50000 km): Supercharger OilCheck (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first)(3.8L Code 1 engine only). Air Cleaner FilterReplacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic TransaxleService (severe conditions only).Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine AccessoryDrive Belt Inspection.Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling SystemService (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.These intervals only summarize maintenance services.Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule onthe following pages.7-5

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule IThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals.FootnotesThe U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.* If your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor, themonitor will show you when to change the oil -- usuallybetween 3,000 miles (5000 km) and 7,500 miles(12 500 km) since your last oil change. Undersevere conditions the indicator may come on before3,000 miles (5000 km). Never drive your vehicle morethan 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months, (whicheveroccurs first), without an oil change.The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if youdrive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every3,000 miles (5000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE OILlight comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitorwhen the oil has been changed. For more information,see “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.7-6

1I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I3,000 Miles (5 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *tDATEACTUAL MILEAGE.. , 7-7SERVICED BY:6,000 Miles (10 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During .tire rotation,check brake calipers for fieedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.DATE ACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY:

I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule9,000 Miles (15 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *I12,000 Miles (20 000 km)I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).DATEACTUAL MILEAGE1SERVICED BY I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY

~~ 7-9~I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I15,000 Miles (25 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Corztrol Service. *0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter ifnecessary. An Emission Control Service.I18,000 Miles (30 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs fist).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guideand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.DATEACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BYDATEACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BYI -

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I21,000 Miles (35 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *24,000 Miles (40 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY IDATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGEBY7-10

I -71 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I27,000 Miles (45 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *DATEACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY:30,000 Miles (50 000 km)17 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).0 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Emission Control Service.(Continued)7-11

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)Ll For Supercharged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service. 3-0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation’’ in the Index for proper rotationpattern and additional information. Duringtire rotation, check brake calipers forfreedom of movement. Refer to theappropriate’ GM service: manual for propercaliper service procedures.I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:I33,000 Miles (55 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:7-12L

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule36,000 Miles (60 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).39,000 Miles (65 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BYI I 1DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY

,‘0 Change’engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires., See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for fkeedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.415,01EO.Mi4es . .(75 OOO’km)0 Change engine oil ,md filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter ifnecessary. An Emission Control Service. 3-DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:, .

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I48,000 Miles (80 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I50,000 Miles (83 000 km)0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90 O F(32 O C) or higher.- In hilly or mountainous terrain.- When doing frequent trailer towing.- Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery service.If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, thefluid andfilter do not require changing.I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE I SERVICED BY I

Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule51,000 Miles (85 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *54,000 Miles (90 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first).[7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BYDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

17 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *60,000 Miles (100 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *17 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.0 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y(Continued)

1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Emission Control Service.?0 For supercharged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service.63,000 Miles (105 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *I I I 1DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGEBYI I I IDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-166,000 Miles (110 000 km)Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first).Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.69,000 Miles (115 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *I DATEI ACTUALMILEAGEI7-19

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule72,000 Miles (120 000 km)El Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).I75,000 Miles (125 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter ifnecessary. An Emission Control Service.DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B YDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 178,000 Miles (130 000 km) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *AII Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs fist).Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’,ain the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: II DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY7-21

I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule84,000 Miles (140 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every*3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).I87,000 Miles (145 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:DATEACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule90,000 Miles (150 000 km)El Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).0 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Emission Control Service. ?>0 For supercharged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants’’ in this section.An Emission Control Service. 3-17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation’’ in the Index for proper rotationpattern and additional information. Duringtire rotation, check brake calipers forfreedom of movement. Refer to theappropriate GM service manual for propercaliper service procedures.

1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I93,000 Miles (155 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. 896,000 Miles (160 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. 80 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first).DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGEBYDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule99,000 Miles (165 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *I100,000 Miles (166 000 km)El Drain, flush and refill cooling system(or every 60 months since last service,whichever occurs first). See “EngineCoolant” in the Index for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap and neck. Pressure test coolingsystem and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.0 Inspect spark plug wires.An Emission Control Service.0 Replace spark plugs.An Emission Control Service.I I I 1DATEACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY:(Continued)

I Short TriplCity Maintenance .Schedule 1100,QOO Miles (166 QUO h) (Continued)0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90 O F(32°C) or higher.- In hilly or mountainous terrain.- When doing frequent trailer towing.- Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery service.If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid andfilter do require not changing.DATEACTUAL MILEAGEiSERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance ScheduleThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals.FootnotesThe U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.* If your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor, themonitor will show you when to change the oil -- usuallybetween 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles(12 500 km) since your last oil change. Undersevere conditions, the indicator may come on before3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle morethan 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months, (whicheveroccurs first), without an oil change.The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if youdrive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil every3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE OILlight comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitorwhen the oil has been changed. For more information,see “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule7,500 Miles (12 500 km)Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs fist).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).c] Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for fi-eedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.I15,000 Miles (25 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).AH Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y7-28

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, wlvchever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle sMt linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional mformation. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.30,000 Miles (50 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).0 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Enlission Control Service.(Continued)

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)0 For supercharged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service.IIDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY37,500 Miles (62 500 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An. Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guiand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs fiist).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for fi-eedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.d1ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:r --

3 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule-45,000 Miles (75 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).iDATEACTUALIMILEAGE . SERVICED BY:50,000 Miles (83 000 km)0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90 OF(32°C) or higher..- In hilly or mountainous terrain.- When doing frequent trailer towing.- Uses such as found ' in taxi, police ordelivery service.If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid andfilter do not require changing.7-31

Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule52,500 Miles (87 500 km)Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. 80 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.I60,000 Miles (100 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).AII EnIissioI? Control Service. 80 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).I7 For supercharged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service.?7-32

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.17 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Emission Control Service. 3-DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE -167,500 Miles (112 500 km)Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 175,OOO..Miles (125 000 km)0 Change,engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).82,500 Miles (137 500 km)i0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs fust).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, p,mking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for freedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for4.proper caliper service procedures.DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVZCED BY:DATE ,ACTUAL ~MLEAGE SERVICED BY:7-34I I I3 ,

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance SchedL-,90,000 Miles (150 000 km)0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *17 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).0 Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service.0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for anydamage. Replace parts as needed.An Emission Control Service.0 For supercnarged engines only: Check thesupercharger oil level and add oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occursfirst). See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service.I I IDATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY.

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule97,500 Miles (102 500 kml0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. *0 Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand the underbody contact points and linkage (orevery 12 ‘months, whichever occurs first).Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper- rotation pattern andadditional ‘information. During tire rotation,check brake calipers for fteedom of movement.Refer to the appropriate GM service manual forproper caliper service procedures.I... 1). .Go1 c100,000 Miles (166 000 km)0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system(or every 60 months since last service,whichever occurs first). See “EngineCoolant’’ in the Index for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap and neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service. 3-0 Inspect spark plug wires.An Emission Control Service.0 Replace spark plugs.An Emission Control Service.7-36

0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90 O F(32°C) or higher.- In hilly or mountainous terrain.- When doing frequent trailer towing.- Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery service.If you do not use your vehicle undeT any of theseconditions, the fluid andfilter do require not changing.I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:7-37

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed below are owner checks and services whichshould be performed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability and emission controlperformance of your vehicle.Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Part D.At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendant toperform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index forfurther details.Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in theIndex for further details.Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer tank and add the proper fluid ifnecessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Indexfor further details.At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckMake sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See“Tires” in the Index for further details.Cassette Deck ServiceClean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Indexfor further details.

Power Antenna ServiceClean power antenna mast. See “Audio Systems” in theIndex for further details.At Least Twice a YearRestraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages areworking properly. Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. Have any tom or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)At Least Once a YearKey Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the hood, glove boxdoor and console door. Part D tells you what to use.More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment.Starter Switch CheckAutomatic Transaxle CheckCheck the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. A fluid lossmay indicate a problem. Check the system and repairif needed.IWhen you are doing this check, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If it does, you or others could beinjured. Follow the steps below.I1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2.3.Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “ParkingBrake” in the Index if necessary) and theregular brake.NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Ifthe starter works in any other position, your vehicleneeds service.Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) CheckWhen you are doing this check, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If it does, you or others could beinjured. Follow the steps below.2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”in the Index if necessary).NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUNposition, but don’t start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSIneeds service.Steering Column Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe key to LOCK in each shift lever position.The key should turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P).The key should come out only in LOCK.1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)Mechanism CheckA CAUTION:When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle in caseit begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehicle begin to move.Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.@To check the parking brake: With the engine runningand transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this untilthe vehicle is held by the parking brake only.To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease all brakes.Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed below are inspections and services which shouldbe performed at least twice a year (for instance, eachspring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s servicedepartment or other qualified service center do these jobs.Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Proper procedures to perform these services may befound in a Buick service manual. See “Service andOwner Publications” in the Index.Steering, Suspension and Front-Wheel-DriveAxle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension and steeringsystem for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs ofwear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steeringlines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the driveaxle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replaceseals if necessary.Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system, Inspect the bodynear the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,7-42holes, loose connections, or other conditions whichcould cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could letexhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” inthe Index.Radiator and Heater Hose InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced if they arecracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace as needed.Throttle Linkage InspectionInspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding,and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts asneeded. Replace any cables that have high effort orexcessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruisecontrol cables.Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Also inspect drum brake liningsfor wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, includingdrums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more often if your driving habitsor conditions result in frequent braking.

wicantsandNOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number or spe ification may be obtained from yourGM dealer.USAGEEngine OilEngine CoolantFLUID/LUBRICANTEngine oil with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines “S tarburst”symbol of the proper viscosity. Todetermine the preferred viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, see“Engine Oil” in the Index.50/50 mixture of clean water(preferably distilled) and GMGoodwrench’ DEX-COOL TM orHavoline@ DEX-COOL TM(orange-colored, silicate-free)antifreeze conforming to GMSpecification 6277M. See “EngineCoolant’’ in the Index.1USAGECoolantSupplementSealerParking BrakeCable GuidesPower SteeringSystemAutomaticTransaxleKey LockCylindersFLUID/LUBRICANTGM Part No. 3634621 orequivalent with a complete flushand refill.Chassis lubricant (GM PartNo. 1052497 or equivalent) orlubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category LBor GC-LB.GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pt.,1050017 - 1 qt., or equivalent).DEXRON@-111 AutomaticTransmission Fluid.Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube@(GM Part No. 12346241or equivalent).

~~~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~USAGESuperchargerChassisLubricationWindshieldWasher SolventHood LatchAssembly,Pivots, SpringAnchor andRelease PawlFLUIDlLUBRICANTSupercharger Oil (GM PartNo. 12345982). See “SuperchargerOil” in the Index.Chassis lubricant (GM PartNo. 1052497 or equivalent) orlubricant meeting requirementsIof NLGI Grade 2, Category LBor GC-LB.GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent(GM Part No. 1051515) orequivalent.Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GMPart No. 12346293 or equivalent)or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category LB orGC-LB.IUSAGEHood and DoorHingesWeatherstripConditioningFLUID/LUBRICANTMulti-purpose lubricant, Superlube@(GM Part No. 12346241or equivalent).Dielectric Silicone Grease (GMPart No. 12345579 or equivalent).See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommendedreplacement filters and spark plugs.7-44

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record thedate, odometer reading and who performed the servicein the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.Any additional information from “Owner Checks andServices” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added onthe following record pages. Also, you should retain allmaintenance receipts. Your owner information portfoliois a convenient place to store them.Maintenance RecordODOMETERDATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED7-45

7-46Maintenance Record

Section 8 Customer Assistance InformationHere you will find out how to contact Buick if youneed assistance. This section also tells you how toobtain service publications and how to report anysafety defects.This section includes information on:0 The Customer Satisfaction Procedure0 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)Users0 Roadside Assistance0 Courtesy Transportation0 BBB Auto Line -- Alternative DisputeResolution Program0 Reporting Safety Defects0 Service and Owner PublicationsCustomer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and Buick. Normally, any concern you may have8-1

with your vehicle can be handled by your selling orservicing dealer. Your dealer has the facility, trainedtechnicians, special tools and up-to-date information topromptly address any issue which may arise. Buick hasempowered its dealers to make decisions and repairvehicles, and they are eager to resolve your concern toyour complete satisfaction. If your concern has not beenresolved to your satisfaction, take the following steps:STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with amember of dealer management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or PartsManager, contact the owner of the dealership or theGeneral Manager.STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership without furtherhelp, contact the Buick Customer AssistanceCenter by calling 1-800-521 -7300. In Canada,contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Centerin Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French).For help outside of the United States and Canada, callthe following numbers as appropriate:0 In Mexico: (525) 625-32560 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-99940 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135(English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish)0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the BritishVirgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 1220 In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 13 150 In other overseas locations, call GM North AmericanExport Sales in Canada at 1-905-644-41 128-2

For prompt assistance, please have the followinginformation available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:Your name, address, home and businesstelephone numbers0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or the plate atthe top left of the instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.)0 Dealership name and location0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage0 Nature of concernWe encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiryprompt attention. However, if you wish to writeBuick, write to:Buick Motor DivisionCustomer Assistance Center902 E. Hamilton AvenueFlint, MI, 48550Refer to your Warranty and Owner AssistanceInformation booklet for addresses of Canadian and GMOverseas offices.When contacting Buick, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved in the dealership, usingthe dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Buick has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate withBuick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

P--%denAssistar-c 7Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick PremiumRoadside Assistance to customers for vehicles coveredunder the 3 year/36,000 mile (60,000 km) new carwarranty (whichever occurs first).Our commitment to Buick owners has always includedsuperior service through our network of 3,000 Buickdealers, Buick Premium Roadside Assistance providesan extra measure of convenience and security.Buick Premium Roadside Assistance:- Provides owners with access to minor repairs ortowing for disabled vehicles.- Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations byproviding easy access to service professionals trainedto work with Buick owners, 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year, including weekends and holidays.For details on Buick Premium Roadside Assistance,please consult your Buick Premium Roadside Assistanceowner booklet included with your owner’s manual. Forneeded assistance, call the Buick Premium RoadsideAssistance toll-free hotline: 1-800-252- 11 12.lian Kcds e LVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveRoadside Assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theseparate brochure provided by the dealer or call1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

Courtesy TransportationTo Buick Motor Division, Quality Means Service -- andservice means “keeping you on the road.”Included with your 1996 Buick new car warranty(36 month/36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever occursfirst), is Courtesy Transportation, a program which willprovide Buick retail customers with:- Reimbursement toward a loaner vehicle, courtesy ofBuick Motor Division, for up to five days forvehicles requiring overnight warranty repairs. Also,reimbursement up to $30 a day (five days maximum)may be available for the cost of a rental car, bus oreven a cab.- A free one-way shuttle ride up to 10 miles from thedealership is available for customers whose vehiclesrequire same-day warranty repairs.Courtesy Transportation is Buick’s way of extending thePremium Service you’ve come to expect from Buickand its 3,000 dealers. Please review the CourtesyTransportation glove box card contained in your vehicle,or consult your Buick dealer for details.Some state insurance regulations make it impractical torent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you areunder 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Buickwill reimburse you up to $30/day, for any documentedtransportation you receive. Please consult your dealerfor details.For warranty repairs during the Complete VehicleCoverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,interim transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation program. Please consult yourdealer for details. The Courtesy Transportation programis available only in the United States and Canada.

GM Participation in’;.BBB AUTOLINE - Alternative ;DisputeResolution Program**This program may not be available in all states,depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet.General Motors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or to discontinue its participation inthis program.Both Buick and your Buick dealer are committed tomaking sure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if asituation arises where you feel your concern hasnot been adequately addressed, the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure described earlier in thissection is very successful.There may be instances where an impartial third partycan assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreementregarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving thesedisagreements, Buick voluntarily participates in BBBAUTO LINE.BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court programadministered by the Better Business Bureau system tosettle disputes between customers and automobilemariufacturers. This program is available fi-ee of chargeto customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle.; I f you are not satisfied after following the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB uskgthe toll-free telephone number, or write them at thefollowing address:BBB AUTO LINECouncil of Better Business Bureaus4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100To file a .claim, you will be asked to provide your nameand address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),and a statement of the nature of your complaint.Eligibility is luted by vehicle age and mileage, andother factors.8-6

We prefer you utilize the Customer SatisfactionProcedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but youmay contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attemptto resolve the complaint serving as an intermediarybetween you and Buick. If this mediation isunsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduledwhere eligible customers may present their case to animpartial third-party arbitrator.The arbitrator will make a decision which you mayaccept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will bebound by that decision. The entire dispute resolutionprocedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from thetime you file a claim until a decision is made.Some state laws may require you to use this programbefore filing a claim with a state-run arbitration programor in the courts. For further information, contact theBBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Buick CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-955-7300.REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE UNITED STATESGOVERNMENTIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying General Motors.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in theWashington, D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE CANADIANGOVERNMENTIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:Transport CanadaBox 8880Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO GENERAL MOTORSIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)in a situation like this, we certainly hope you'll notifyus. Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:Buick Motor DivisionCustomer Assistance Center902 E. Hamilton AvenueFlint, MI 48550In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Assistance Center1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario LlH 8P78-8

Service and Owner PublicationsService ManualsService manuals contain diagnostic and repairinformation for all chassis and body systems. They maybe useful for owners who wish to get a greaterunderstanding of their vehicle. They are also useful forowners with the appropriate skill level or training whowish to perform “do-it-yourself” service. These areauthentic General Motors service manuals meant forprofessional, qualified technicians.Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals andother service literature are available for purchase for allcurrent and many past model General Motors vehicles.Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information:United States ............... 1-800-55 1-4123Canada .................... 1-800-668-5539

Service BulletinsService bulletins covering various subjects are regularlysent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitorsproduct performance in the field. When service methodsare found which promote better service on GM vehicles,bulletins are created to help the technician performbetter service. Service bulletins may involve anynumber of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensiveservice; others will describe expensive service. Somewill advise of new or unexpected conditions, and othersmay help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletinsare meant for qualified technicians. In some casesbulletins refer to service manuals, specialized tools,equipment and safety procedures necessary to servicethe vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughoutthe model year and beyond, an index is required andpublished quarterly to help identify specific bulletins.Subscriptions are available. You can order an index atthe toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask a GMdealer to see an index or individual bulletin.Owner PublicationsOwner’s manuals, warranty folders and various ownerassistance booklets provide owners with generaloperation and maintenance information.8-10 -

nSection 9 InAir Bag ...................................... 1 . 17How Does it Restrain .......................... 1-21How it Works ................................ 1 . 19Location .................................... 1-19Readiness Light ......................... 1.18. 2.70Servicing ................................... 1-22What Makes it Inflate .......................... 1-20What Will You See After it Inflates ............... 1-21When Should it Inflate ......................... 1-20Aircleaner .................................... 6-17Air Conditioning ................................ 3-6Air Conditioning Refrigerants ..................... 6-65Air Control. Climate Control System ............. 3.1. 3-3Alarm. Instant. Keyless Entry ...................... 2-8Alarm. Universal Theft-Deterrent .................. 2- 16Alignment and Balance. Tire ...................... 6-44Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ...................... 6-53Antenna. Power ................................ 3-32Antifreeze ..................................... 6-23Anti-LockBrake System Warning Light ................ 2.72.4.6Brakes ...................................... 4-6Anti.Theft. Radio .............................. 3-27Appearancecare ............................... 6-47Appearance Care Materials ....................... 6-55Arbitration Program .............................. 8-6Armrest. Storage ............................... 2-59Ashtrays ...................................... 2-61Astroroof ..................................... 2-63Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control ....... 3-29Audio Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-30Audio Systems ................................. 3-12Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control ............. 3-3Automatic Pull-Down Feature. Trunk ............... 2-15AutomaticOverdrive ................................... 2-25Ride Control ................................. 2-26Transaxle Check .............................. 7-39Transaxle Fluid ............................... 6-20Transaxle Operation ........................... 2-23Transaxle Park Mechanism Check ................ 7-41Battery ...................................... 6-33Jump Starting ................................. 5-2Replacement. Keyless Entry .................... 2-12Rundown Protection ........................... 2-50Warning Light ............................... 2-70Warnings ................................ 5.2. 5.4BBB Auto Line ................................. 8-6Belt. Engine Accessory ..................... 6.67. 6.68Better Business Bureau Mediation ................... 8-69-1

. ..Adjustment .................................. 6-32Fluid ......................................... 6-30Master Cylinder ............................... 6-30Parking .. i.................................. 2-276-32Pedal Travel ....-................................Replacing System Parts ......................... 6-33System Warning Light ......................... 2-71Trailer ....................................... 4-34Transaxle Shift Interlock ....................... 2-30Transaxle Shift Interlock Check .................. 7-40Wear ......................................... 6-32Brakes, Anti-Lock. ............................... 4-6Braking ........................................ :4-5Braking in Emergencies ............................ 4-9Break-In, New Vehicle .......................... 2-19Brightness Control .............................. 2-46BTSI ......................................... 2-30BTSICheck ................................... 7-40Bulb Replacement .............................. 6-34Canadian Roadside Assistance ..... 1. ............. 8-4Capacities apd Specifications ........................ 6-64Carbon Monoxide ......... : .......... 2-31,2-32, 4-27Cassette Deck Service ........................... 7-38Cassette Tape Player .................. 3-14,3-17, 3-24Cassette Tape Player Care ......................... 3-3 1Cassette Tape Player Errors ........ : .... 3-14,3-18, 3-25CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature .................. 3-27Center Passenger Position ........................ 1-24Central Door Unlocking System .................... 2-49-2Certification Label .......................... !’. ... 4-29Certification/”ire Label ..................... 4.28,4.29Chains. Safety .................................. 4-34Chains. Tire .........;......................... 6-46Change Oil Soon Light .......................... 2-80Changing a Flat Tire ............................. 5-22Check Engine Light ............................. 2-75Check Oil Level Light ........................... 2-79Checking Your. Restraint Systems .................. 1-44Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... 6-54Child Restraints ................................ 1-33Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position ............ 1-35Securing in the Center . Rear Seat Position .......... 1-37Securing in the Right Front Seat Position .......... 1-39TopStrap .................................... 1- 34Where to Put ................................. 1-33Cigarette Lighter ............................... 2-61Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-58Cleaner. Air ................................... 6-17CleaningAluminum Wheels ........................ ’ .... 6-53Fabric ...................................... 6-48Glass ........................................6-51Inside of Your Buick .......................... 6-47InstrumentPanel ............................. 6-50Leather ..................................... 6-49Outside of Your Buick .......................... 6-52Speaker Covers ............................. 6-50Special Problems ............................ 6-48Stains ...................................... 6-48Tires ........................................ 6-53Vinyl ....................................... 6-49

Wheels ..................................... 6-53Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 6-51Climate Control. Steering Wheel Touch Control ....... 3- 11Climate Control System ........................... 3- 1Clock. Setting the ............................... 3-12Coinholder .................................... 2-59Comfort Controls ................................ 3 - 1Comfort Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control ..... 3- 11Compact Disc Care ............................. 3-3 1Compact Disc Player ....................... 3- 18. 3.22Compact Disc Player Errors .................. 3.20. 3.25Compact Spare Tire ............................. 5-34Compass. Rearview Mirror with ................... 2-52Control of a Vehicle .............................. 4-5Convenience Net ............................... 2-60Convex Outside Mirror .......................... 2-55Coolant ....................................... 6-23Heater, Engine ............................... 2-22Recovery Tank .......................... 5-14. 5-16Cooling System ................................ 5- 14Cornering Lamps ............................... 2-45Courtesy Lamps ................................. 2-47Courtesy Transportation ........................... 8-5Cruise Control ................................. 2-39Cupholders .................................... 2-59Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users ......... 8-3Customer Assistance Information ................... 8- 1Customer Satisfaction Procedure .................... 8- 1Damage. Finish ............................... 6-54Damage. Sheet Metal ............................ 6-53Daytime Running Lamps ......................... 2-44Dead Battery ................................... 5-2Defects. Reporting Safety ..................... 8-7 . 8-8Defensive Driving ............................... 4-1Defogger. Rear Window ......................... 3 . 10Defogging ..................................... 3-9Defrosting ..................................... 3-9Dimensions. Vehicle ............................ 6-66Dolby B Noise Reduction .............. 3-14.3-17. 3-25DoorAjar Reminder ............................... 2-81Central Unlocking System ....................... 2-4Locks ....................................... 2-3Driver Position ................................. 1 . 11DrivingCity ........................................ 4-19Defensive .................................... 4-1Drunken ..................................... 4-2Freeway .................................... 4-20InaBlizzard ................................. 4-26In Foreign Countries ........................... 6-4In the Rain .................................. 4-16Night ...................................... 4-14On Curves ................................... 4-9On Grades While Towing a Trailer ............... 4-36On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... 4-22OnSnowandIce ............................. 4-25Throughwater ............................... 4-18WetRoads .................................. 4-16Winter ...................................... 4-24With a Trailer ................................ 4-34Drunken Driving ................................ 4-29-3

Electrical Equipment. Adding ............... 3.30. 6.57Electrical System ............................... 6-57Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror .......... 2-5 1Electronic Level Control ......................... 4-30Electronic Touch Climate Control ................... 3- 1Engine .................................. 6.10. 6.11Accessory Belt .......................... 6.67. 6.68Coolant ..................................... 6-23Coolant Heater ............................... 2-22Coolant Level Check .......................... 7-38Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-74Coolant Temperature Warning Light .............. 2-74Exhaust ..................................... 2-31Identification ................................ 6-56OilLevelCheck .............................. 7-38Overheating ................................. 5-12Running While Parked ......................... 2-32Specifications ................................ 6-65Starting ..................................... 2-21Supercharged ................................ 6-11Engineoil .................................... 6- 12Adding ..................................... 6-13Additives ................................... 6-15Checking ................................... 6-13LifeMonitor ................................. 2-80Pressure Light/Gage ........................... 2-78Used ....................................... 6-16Whentochange .............................. 6-16Entry Lighting. Delayed .......................... 2-47Exhaust. Engine ................................ 2-31Exit Lighting. Delayed ........................... 2-47Express-Down Window .......................... 2-33Express-Open Sunroof ........................... 2-63Fabric Cleaning ............................... 6-48Fan Control. Climate Control System ........ 3.2.3.4. 3.5Filling Your Tank ................................ 6-5Filter. Air ..................................... 6-17Filter. Engine Oil ............................... 6-16Finish Care .................................... 6-52Finish Damage ................................. 6-54First Gear, Automatic Transaxle ................... 2-26Flashers. Hazard Warning ......................... 5-1Flat Tire. Changing ............................. 5-22Fluid Capacities ................................ 6-64Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 7-43Foreign Countries, Fuel ........................... 6-4French .............................Language 11 ManFront Storage Armrest ........................... 2-59FrontTowing ................................... 5-9Fuel .......................................... 6-3Canada ...................................... 6-4DoorLock ................................... 6-6Filling Your Tank .............................. 6-5Gage ....................................... 2-82InForeign Countries ........................... 6-4Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 6-589-4

GagesEngine Coolant Temperature .................... 2-74Engine Oil Pressure ........................... 2-78Fuel ....................................... 2-82Garage Door Opener ............................ 2-56GAWR ....................................... 4-29Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle ................ 2-23GloveBox .................................... 2-55Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................ 4-29Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................... 4-29..Guide en Franqais ................................. 11GVWR ....................................... 4-29Halogen Bulbs ................................ 6-34Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 5-1Head Restraints ................................. 1-5Headlamps .................................... 2-43Bulb Replacement ............................ 6-34High/'Low Beam Changer ...................... 2-36On Reminder ................................ 2-44Wiring ..................................... 6-57Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance .............. 8-3Heated Outside Mirror ........................... 2-55Heatedseats .................................... 1-3Heating ........................................ 3-7High-Beam Headlamps .......................... 2-36Highway Hypnosis .............................. 4-22Hill and Mountain Roads ......................... 4-22Hitches. Trailer ................................. 4-33HoodChecking Things Under ......................... 6-8Release ...................................... 6-8Horn ......................................... 2-33Hydroplaning .................................. 4-18Ignition Switch ................................ 2-20Illuminated Entry ............................... 2-47Inflation. Tire .................................. 6-40Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror ................. 2-50InspectionsBrakesystem ................................ 7-42Exhaust Systems ............................. 7-42Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot .................. 7-42Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal ................... 7-42Radiator and Heater Hose ...................... 7-42Steering .................................... 7-42Suspension .................................. 7-42Throttle Linkage ............................... 7-42Instrument Panel ............................... 2-64Brightness Control ............................ 2-46Cleaning .................................... 6-50Cluster ................................ 2-66, 2-67FuseBlock .................................. 6-59Interior Lamps ................................. 2-46Jack. Tire .................................... 5-24Jump Starting ................................... 5-2.

Key Lock Cylinders Service ..................... 7-39Key Reminder Warning .......................... 2-21Keyless Entry System. RemoteInstant Alarm ................................. 2-8Personal Choice ............................... 2-8Keys .......................................... 2-1LabelsCertification ................................. 4-29Certificationflire ............................. 4-28Service Parts Identification ..................... 6-56Tire-Loading Information ...................... 4-28Vehicle Identification Number ................... 6-56Lamps ........................................ 2-43Courtesy .................................... 2-47Interior ..................................... 2-46Monitor System .............................. 2-45OnReminder ................................ 2-44Perimeter Lighting ............................ 2-48TheaterDimming ............................. 2-47Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-7Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ....... 2-29License Plate Holder ............................ 2-63Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel .................... 2-46Lighter ....................................... 2-61 .LightsAir Bag Readiness ....................... 1 - 18. 2-70Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............ 2-72.4-6Battery Warning .............................. 2-70Brake System Warning ......................... 2-71ChangeOilSoon ............................. 2-80CheckEngine ................................ 2-75DoorAjar ................................... 2-81Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 2-74Engine Oil Pressure Light/Gage ................. 2-78Interior ..................................... 2-46Low Coolant Warning ......................... 2-75LowFuel ................................... 2-82OilLevelCheck .............................. 2-79Safety Belt Reminder ...................... 1-6, 2-69Traction Control System Warning ............ 2-73, 4-8TrunkAjar .................................. 2-81Loading Your Vehicle ........................... 4-28LocksCylinders ................................... 7-39Door ........................................ 2-3FuelDoor .................................... 6-6Key Lock Cylinder Service ..................... 7-39Lockout Protection ............................. 2-7Memory Door ................................. 2-4PowerDoor .................................. 2-4Rear Door Security ............................. 2-6Steering Column Lock Check ................... 7-40Trunk ...................................... 2-13Window .................................... 2-33Low Coolant Warning Light ...................... 2-75LowFuelLight ................................ 2-82Lubricants and Fluids ............................ 7-43Lubrication Service, Body ........................ 7-39

Magnasteer ................................. 4.9Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts ............ 6-66Maintenance Record ............................ 7-45Maintenance Schedule ............................ 7-1Long Tripmghway Definition ................... 7-5Long Tripmighway Intervals .................... 7-27Owner Checks and Services ..................... 7-38Periodic Maintenance Inspections ................ 7-42Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-43Scheduled Maintenance Services .................. 7-3Short Trip/City Definition ....................... 7-4Short Trip/City Intervals ........................ 7-6Maintenance. Underbody ......................... 6-54Maintenance When Trailer Towing ................. 4-37Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...................... 2-75Manual Front Seat ............................... 1-1Maxifuse/Relay Center .......................... 6-58Memory Door Locks ............................. 2-4Memory Seat and Mirrors ......................... 1-2Methanol ...................................... 6-4Mirrors ....................................... 2-50Convex Outside .............................. 2-55Electrochromic Daymight Rearview .............. 2-5 1Heated Outside ............................... 2-55Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... 2-50Power Remote Control ......................... 2-54Visor Vanity ................................. 2-62MMT ......................................... 6-4MountainRoads ................................ 4-22Multifunction Lever ............................. 2-34Net. Convenience .............................. 2-60Neutral. Automatic Transaxle ..................... 2-24New Vehicle Break-In ........................... 2-19Nightvision ................................... 4-15Odometer .................................... 2-68Odometer. Trip ................................. 2-68Off-Road Recovery ............................. 4-11Oil. Engine .................................... 6-12Oil Level Check Light ........................... 2-79Oil Pressure Light/Gage .......................... 2-78Oil. Supercharger ............................... 6-19Opener. Garage Door ............................ 2-56Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle ................... 2-25Overheating Engine ............................. 5-12Owner Checks and Services ....................... 7-38Owner Publications. Ordering ...................... 8-9Paint Spotting. Chemical ........................ 6-54ParkAutomatic Transaxle .......................... 2-23Shifting Into ................................. 2-28Shifting Out of ............................... 2-30ParkingAtNight .................................... 2-16Brake ...................................... 2-27Brake Mechanism Check ....................... 7-41Lots ....................................... 2-16Over Things That Burn ........................ 2-31With a Trailer ................................ 4-369-7

Passenger Temperature Control .................... 3- 1 IPassing ................................ 4-12PASS-Key *'b. I1 ... ................................. 2-18Perimeter Lighting .............................. 2-48Periodic Maintenance Inspections .................. 7-42Personal Choice Features. Keyless Entry ............. 2-8PowerAntenna Mast Care ............................ 3-32Antennaservice .............................. 7-39DoorLocks ................................... 2-4Remote Control Mirror ........................ 2-54Seat ......................................... 1-1Seatback Recliner .............................. 1-4Steering ..................................... 4-9Steering Fluid ................................ 6-28Windows ................................... 2-33Power, Retained Accessory ....................... 2-21Power SeatMemory Function .............................. 1-2Regnancy, Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-23Problems on the Road ............................ 5- 1Protection, Lockout .............................. 2-7Publications, Service and Owner .................... 8-9Pull-Down Feature, Automatic, Trunk .............. 2- 15Radiator ................................ 5.14. 5.19Radiator Pressure Cap ........................... 6-27Radio Reception ................................ 3-30Radios ....................................... 3-12Rain. Driving In ................................ 4- 16Reading Lamps ................................ 2-49RearDoor Security Locks ........................... 2-6Outside Seat Position .......................... 1-25Safety Belt Comfort Guides ..................... 1-29Seatpassengers .............................. 1-25Storage Armrest .............................. 2-59Towing ..................................... 5 . 10WindowDefogger ............................ 3-10Rearview MirrorElectrochromic Daymight ...................... 2-51Inside Daymight ............................. 2-50Reclining Front Seatbacks ......................... 1-4Recovery Tank. Coolant ..................... 5- 14. 5- 16Refrigerants. Air Conditioning .................... 6-65RemoteFuel Door Release ............................. 6-6Keyless Entry ................................. 2-7Keyless Entry. Instant Alarm ..................... 2-8Keyless Entry. Personal Choice ................... 2-8Trunk Release ................................ 2-13ReplacementBulbs ...................................... 6-63Parts ....................................... 6-66Wheel ...................................... 6-45Replacing Safety Belts ........................... 1-44Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 8-7. 8.8RestraintsChecking ................................... 1-44Child ....................................... 1-33Head ........................................ 1-5

Replacing Parts After a Crash ................... 1-44Systemcheck ................................ 7-39Reverse. Automatic Transaxle ..................... 2-24Ride Control. Automatic ......................... 2-26Right Front Passenger Position .................... 1-23Roadside Assistance .............................. 8-4Roadside Assistance. Canadian ..................... 8-4Rocking YourVehicle ........................... 5-35Rotation. Tires ................................. 6-41Safety Belt Extender ............................ 1-44Safety Belts .................................... 1-6Adults ...................................... 1-11Care ....................................... 6-50Center Passenger Position ...................... 1-24Children .................................... 1-31Driver Position ............................... 1 - 1 1Extender .................................... 1-44How to Wear Properly ......................... 1 - 1 1Incorrect Usage .................... 1 - 13, 1-42, 1-43LapBelt .................................... 1-24Lap-Shoulder ........................... 1 - 11, 1-26Larger Children .............................. 1-41Questions and Answers ........................ 1 - 10Rear Comfort Guides .......................... 1-29Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............ 1-25Rear Seat Passengers .......................... 1-25Reminder Light .......................... 1-6, 2-69Replacing After a Crash ........................ 1-44Right Front Passenger Position .................. 1-23Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ................... 1-12Smaller Children and Babies .................... 1-31Use During Pregnancy ......................... 1-23WhyThey Work ............................... 1-7Safety Chains .................................. 4-34Safety Defects. Reporting ..................... 8-7. 8-8...Safety Warnings and Symbols ...................... v111Scheduled Maintenance Services .................... 7-3SeatbackPower Recliner ................................ 1-4Reclining Front ............................... 1-4SeatsHeated ...................................... 1-3ManualFront ................................. 1-1Memory ..................................... 1-2Power ....................................... 1-1Restraint Systems .............................. 1 . 1Seat Controls ................................. 1-1Securing a Child Restraint ............ 1-35. 1-37. 1-39Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle ................. 2-25Service ........................................ 6-1Bulletins. Ordering ............................. 8-9Manuals. Ordering ............................. 8-9Parts Identification Label ....................... 6-56Publications. Ordering .......................... 8-9Work. Doing Your Own ......................... 6-2Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6-1Service and Owner Publications .................... 8-9Service Publications .............................. 8-9Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Buick ............ 1-22

Sheet Metal Damage ............................ 6-53ShiftLever .................................... 2-23ShiftingAutomatic Transaxle .......................... 2-23Into Park (P) ................................. 2-28OutofPark .................................. 2-30Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ..................... 1-12Signaling Turns ................................ 2-35Skidding ...................................... 4-13Sound Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-30Spare Tire. Compact ............................. 5-34Speaker Covers. Cleaning ........................ 6-50Specifications and Capacities ...................... 6-64Specifications. Engine ........................... 6-65Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ............... 8-3Speedometer ................................... 2-68SRS ......................................... 1-17Stains. Cleaning ................................ 6-48Starter Switch Check ............................ 7-39Starting Your Engine ............................ 2-21Steam ........................................ 5-12Steering ....................................... 4-9Column Lock Check .......................... 7-40In Emergencies ............................... 4- 10Magnasteer ................................. 4-9Power ....................................... 4-9Tips ......................................... 4-9Wheel. Tilt .................................. 2-34Steering Wheel Touch Controls ............... 3- 11. 3-29Storage Areas .................................. 2-55Storage. Vehicle ................................ 6-33Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow .................. 5-35Sunvisors .................................... 2-62Sunroof ....................................... 2-63Supercharged Engine ............................ 6-11Supercharger Oil ............................... 6-19Supplemental Restraint System .................... 1-17Symbols. Vehicle .................................. xTachometer .................................. 2-68Taillamp Bulb Replacement ....................... 6-36Tape Player Care ............................... 3-31Temperature Control. Climate Control System” ..... 3- 1. 3-3TemperatureControl. Passenger ................... 3-11TheaterDimming ............................... 2-47Theft ......................................... 2-15Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player ................ 3-27THEFTLOCK ................................ 3-27Thermostat .................................... 6-27Third Gear. Automatic Transaxle ................... 2-25Tilt Steering Wheel ............................. 2-34Time Out Feature ............................... 2-47Time. Setting the ............................... 3-12Tirechains .................................... 6-46TireLoading ................................... 4-28Tire-Loading Information Label ................... 4-28Tires ......................................... 6-39Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-44BuyingNew ................................. 6-429-10 ~

Chains ..................................... 6-46Changing a Flat .............................. 5-22Cleaning .................................... 6-53. Compact Spare ............................... 5-34Inflation .................................... 6-40. Inflation Check ............................... 7-38Inspection and Rotation ........................ 6-41Loading .................................... 4-28Pressure ...................................... 6-40Temperature ................................. 6-44Traction .................................... 6-44Treadwear .................................... 6-43Uniform Quality Grading ....................... 6-43Wear Indicators ............................... 6-42Wheel Replacement ........................... 6-45When It's Time for New ....................... 6-42TopStrap ...................................... 1-34TorqueLock .................................... 2-30Torque, Wheel .Nut ......................... 5-31, 6-64Towing 8 Trailer ................................ 4-30Towing Your Vehicle .............................. 5-7TractionControl System ................................ 4-8Control System Wasrning Light .............. 2-73, 4-8TrailerBrakes .'.................................... 4-34DrivingonGrades ............................ 4-36Drivingwith ................................. 4-34Hitches ..................................... 4-33Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-37Parking on Hills .............................. 4-36Safety Chains ................................ 4-34Tongueweight ............................... 4-32Total Weight on Tires .......................... 4-33Towing ..................................... 4-30Turnsignals ................................. 4-36Weight ...................................... 4-32Transaxle Fluid.Automatic.........?.........................6-20Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry ................. 2-7Transportation, Courtesy .........I ................. 8-5Trip Odometer ................................. 2-68TrUnkAjarLight ................................... 2-81Automatic Pull-Down Feature ................... 2-15Lock ....................................... 2-13Release, Remote .............................. 2-13SecurityOverride .............................. 2-14TrUnkLamp ................................... 2-50TTYUsers ..................................... 8-3Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ............. 2-35Turn Signal On Chime ........................... 2-36Turn SignalNultifunction Lever ................... 2-34Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ................ 4-36Twilight Sentinel ............................... 2-46. underbody Flushing Service ..................... 7-41Underbody Maintenance ......................... 6-54l Universal Theft-Deterrent System .................. 2-16. ~~i. .%ll

VehicleControl ...................................... 4-5Damage Warnings ................................ ixDimensions ................................. 6-66Identification Number ......................... 6-56Loading .................................... 4-28Storage ...................................... 6-33Ventilation System ............................... 3-7Visor Vanity Mirrors ............................ 2-62Visors, Sun .................................... 2-62Voltage Indicator ................................ 2-7 1warning Devices ........................... 5.1. 5.2Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ................ 2-69Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ 6-29Washing Your Vehicle ..:........................ 6-52Weatherstrips ................................... 6-52WheelAlignment .................................. 6-44LockKey ................................... 5-25Nut Torque ............................. 5-31, 6-64Replacement ...............................:.. 6-45Wrench ..................................... 5-23WindowLock .................................. 2-33Windows ..................................... 2-33Express-Down ............................... 2-33Power ...................................... 2-33Windshield Washer ............................. 2-38Fluid ................................... 2-38, 6-29Fluid Level Check ............................ 7-38Windshield Wiper ............................... 2-37Blade Replacement ........................... 6-38Fuses ....................................... 6-57Winter Driving ................................. 4-24Wiring, Headlamp ............................... 6-57WreckerTowing ................................. 5-7Wrench ,Wheel ................................. 5-24

.. .